Burny 1250 Manual

BURNY
1250 & 1250 Plus

OPERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Operation and Maintenance Manual
Revision: March 2001 (For use with software version 5/7/95 and later) AO-73367-B
This documentation may not be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable format without explicit written permission from the BURNY DIVISION OF CLEVELAND MACHINE CONTROLS.
Cleveland Machine Controls 2001 Burny Division 7550 Hub Parkway Cleveland, Ohio 44125-5794 Telephone: 216 / 524-8800 Fax: 216 / 642-2199
Burny 1250
Documentation for compliance with the EMC Directive (EC)
These instructions must be followed during the installation of the Burny 1250 control. This insures compliance with the EC s EMC Directive, and provides the best protection against outside RFI interference. These installation procedures should be used for ALL installations.
Contents: Installation instructions for EMC compatibility Drawings AO-72102 AO-72103 AO-72104 AO-72105 AO-72106 AO-72107 AO-72108
Burny 1250 -- Installation Instructions to insure compliance with EMC Directive

1. All Cabinet screws on the Burny 1250 enclosure must be installed and securely tightened. 2. All cables connected to the Burny 1250 must be supplied by Burny-Etek, or must be built to Burny-Etek cable specifications. Specific cable construction drawings will be supplied upon request. 3. All cables connected to the Burny 1250 must have external braid shielding, with metal ground clamps at each end of the cable to connect the braid to the equipment. Metal grounding clamps must fit tightly onto the external braid-- if clamp is loose, gently crimp the clamp onto the braid to provide a secure connection. Dont crimp any harder than necessary to avoid damaging the internal cable. (Customer supplied cables which do not use external braid must be approved by Burny-Etek). Armature/Tach cables (MO-06926-XXX and others) require a metal grounding clamp to be installed at both ends of the cable. At the Burny 1250, the external braid on the Motor/Tach cable should be grounded to the cabinet grounding screw closest to the RMTR and CMTR connectors using a 360 degree contact metal grounding clamp-- See drawing AO-72105. At the Motor end of the cable, the external braid must be grounded to the motor mounting bracket using the metal cable clamp as shown in drawing AO-72106
All other cables that connect to the back of the Burny 1250 enclosure must have their external braid grounded to the Burny 1250 enclosure with metal clamps: Encoder cables, RS-232 Cables, Limit Switch Cables, Resolver cables and any other type of cable connected to the back of the Burny 1250 should have its external braid shielding connected to one of the cabinet grounding screws provided on the back of the Burny 1250 enclosure-- using a metal, 360 degree contact grounding clamp. See drawing AO-72105.
Cables to rack mounted encoders (H20 or H25 type) require that their external braid shield be connected to the housing of the encoder using a metal grounding clamp. See drawing AO-72103 for details on grounding the encoder cable to the case of this type of encoder.
Page 1
Burny 1250 -- Installation Instructions to insure compliance with EMC Directive
4. The enclosure of the Burny 1250 must be grounded to the machine frames earth ground connection point by a braided ground strap-- at least 12 mm in width. A wide flat ground strap provides a better RF ground path therefore a strap is preferred. The strap can be terminated with standard crimp terminals at both ends. The strap should connect to one of the chassis grounding screws on the back of the Burny 1250 per drawing AO-72102. 5. Any connectors on the back of any Burny-Etek product that do not have a cable connected must have plastic protective cover installed. This can either be the red disposable type or the attached screw thread covers. 6. If motor mounted encoders are used the MO-11124 Kit must be installed over the junction of the plastic connectors between the encoder cable, and the short lead coming from the encoder. This kit and instructions are shipped with each of the following cables, and are also shown on drawing AO-72107. Cables which require connector shield kit: MO-08798-XXX MO-09938-XXX
7. Service must be performed by trained authorized technicians only. Service technicians must wear a static grounding wristband connected to the equipment enclosure when removing or installing any boards or EPROMS in the system. All circuit cards must be shipped in protective anti-static shielding bags, and any card or part removed from a Burny-Etek product must be immediately placed into one of these anti-static bags. Any circuit card or electronic component returned for credit or repair must be shipped in an anti-static bag. If a circuit card is returned without the proper anti-static packaging, no warranty or credit will be issued. Contact Burny-Etek for specifications or help with anti-static packaging. 8. All motors used with the Burny 1250 must be supplied by Burny-Etek to insure compliance with the radiated emission requirements of the EMC Directive. If other than Burny-Etek supplied motors are used, it is the responsibility of the machine builder to test the motors in the system for compliance with the EMC directive.
Page 2
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
PART 1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW

INTRODUCTION
Safety Precautions ............................................................................PART-1:INTRO-1 General Precautions..........................................................................PART-1:INTRO-1 Machine Precautions ........................................................................PART-1:INTRO-2
GENERAL OPERATIONS SUMMARY

Optional Language Feature ................................................................PART-1:OPER-1 Axis Definitions..................................................................................PART-1:OPER-1 Applying Power to the 1250 ...........................................................PART-1:OPER-1 Keypad Layout ...................................................................................PART-1:OPER-1 Display Key..................................................................................PART-1:OPER-2 Recycle Key .................................................................................PART-1:OPER-2 Numeric Keypad ..........................................................................PART-1:OPER-2 Up and Down Scroll Arrow Keys ................................................PART-1:OPER-3 Speed Control...............................................................................PART-1:OPER-3 Jog Controls .................................................................................PART-1:OPER-4 NC Run.........................................................................................PART-1:OPER-4 Part Return ...................................................................................PART-1:OPER-4 Back Up........................................................................................PART-1:OPER-4 Cycle Start....................................................................................PART-1:OPER-4 Cycle Stop ....................................................................................PART-1:OPER-5 Lifter.............................................................................................PART-1:OPER-5 Clutch ...........................................................................................PART-1:OPER-5 E-Stop...........................................................................................PART-1:OPER-5
PART 2: SYSTEM OPERATIONS

MAIN FUNCTION SELECTION MENU
Run Program..................................................................................... PART-2:MENU-2 Load- From Standard Shapes............................................................ PART-2:MENU-2 Load- From RS-232 .......................................................................... PART-2:MENU-2 Store- From RS-232.......................................................................... PART-2:MENU-2 Delete- Program................................................................................ PART-2:MENU-3 Edit / New- Program......................................................................... PART-2:MENU-3 Store- To Floppy............................................................................... PART-2:MENU-3 Load- From Floppy........................................................................... PART-2:MENU-3 Load / Run RS-232 ........................................................................... PART-2:MENU-3 Load / Run From Floppy ................................................................. PART-2:MENU-4
AO-73367
1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual
STANDARD SHAPE SELECTION

Shape Selection ............................................................................. PART-2:SHAPES-1 Dimensions Common to Most Shapes........................................... PART-2:SHAPES-2
RUNNING A PROGRAM
Plasma - Oxygen / Fuel Selection.........................................................PART-2:RUN-1 Geometry Modification Options...........................................................PART-2:RUN-1 Scaling............................................................................................PART-2:RUN-2 Part Rotation Option ......................................................................PART-2:RUN-2 X/Y Axis Mirror Option ................................................................PART-2:RUN-2 Knife Compensation Option.................................................................PART-2:RUN-3 Dial-In-Kerf Standard Feature..............................................................PART-2:RUN-3 Cutting Mode Selection........................................................................PART-2:RUN-3 Manual Cut.....................................................................................PART-2:RUN-3 Auto Cut .........................................................................................PART-2:RUN-4 Test Run .........................................................................................PART-2:RUN-4 Single Step .....................................................................................PART-2:RUN-5 Cycle Start......................................................................................PART-2:RUN-5 Run-Time Messages .............................................................................PART-2:RUN-6 Running Description.............................................................................PART-2:RUN-8
PART 3: SYSTEM UTILITIES

PROGRAM TEXT EDITOR
Program Editing...................................................................................PART-3:EDIT-1 Main Data Block Display ....................................................................PART-3:EDIT-1 Editing Commands ..............................................................................PART-3:EDIT-2 Line / Arc Block Editing...............................................................PART-3:EDIT-2 Function Block Editing .................................................................PART-3:EDIT-3 Deleting a Data Block ...................................................................PART-3:EDIT-4 Inserting a Data Block...................................................................PART-3:EDIT-4 Terminating the Editor .......................................................................PART-3:EDIT-5 Internal Function Names and Codes....................................................PART-3:EDIT-6 Creating a Sample Program ...............................................................PART-3:EDIT-11
DISPLAY MODES
Display Mode .....................................................................................PART-3:DSPY-1 Exit Mode.....................................................................................PART-3:DSPY-1 X/Y Display .................................................................................PART-3:DSPY-1 Parts Cut.......................................................................................PART-3:DSPY-1 Feedrate........................................................................................PART-3:DSPY-2 System Status ...............................................................................PART-3:DSPY-2 Service Displays...........................................................................PART-3:DSPY-2 Configuration ...............................................................................PART-3:DSPY-2
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
Manual Control Mode ................................................................... PART-3:SPCFNC-1
AO-73367
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Plasma / Oxygen Fuel Cutting Selection ................................ PART-3:SPCFNC-1 Oxygen / Fuel Control Functions............................................ PART-3:SPCFNC-2 Oxy Preheat / Cut ............................................................. PART-3:SPCFNC-2 Oxy Enable ....................................................................... PART-3:SPCFNC-2 Oxy Start........................................................................... PART-3:SPCFNC-3 Preheat .............................................................................. PART-3:SPCFNC-3 Plasma Manual Control Functions.......................................... PART-3:SPCFNC-3 Plasma Cut........................................................................ PART-3:SPCFNC-3 Plasma Cut / Jog ............................................................... PART-3:SPCFNC-4 Plasma Enable................................................................... PART-3:SPCFNC-4 Plasma Start ...................................................................... PART-3:SPCFNC-4 Height Disable .................................................................. PART-3:SPCFNC-4 Marker Test ...................................................................... PART-3:SPCFNC-5 Go Home........................................................................................ PART-3:SPCFNC-5 Go Home Menu....................................................................... PART-3:SPCFNC-5 Go To Table Home From Part Programs ................................ PART-3:SPCFNC-6 Set Home ....................................................................................... PART-3:SPCFNC-7
FLOPPY DRIVE OPERATION

Floppy Disk Drives........................................................................ PART-3:FLOPPY-1 Floppy Utilities Disk ..................................................................... PART-3:FLOPPY-1 Serial Connection .......................................................................... PART-3:FLOPPY-2 Loading Files from the Floppy ...................................................... PART-3:FLOPPY-2 Saving Files to Floppy Disk .......................................................... PART-3:FLOPPY-2
PART 4: PART PROGRAMMING

PROGRAMMING THE NC CONTROL WORD ADDRESS PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE
Word Address Programming ............................................................PART-4:WADR-1 Word Address Data Block Specification..........................................PART-4:WADR-1 Key Character Descriptions .......................................................PART-4:WADR-1 N - Line Number..................................................................PART-4:WADR-1 P - Program Number ............................................................PART-4:WADR-1 X - Dimension for Lines or Arcs .........................................PART-4:WADR-2 Y - Dimension for Lines or Arcs .........................................PART-4:WADR-2 I - Dimension for Arcs.........................................................PART-4:WADR-2 J - Dimension for Arcs.........................................................PART-4:WADR-3 G - Preparatory Functions....................................................PART-4:WADR-4 M - Auxiliary Functions ......................................................PART-4:WADR-5 F - Dwell Time ....................................................................PART-4:WADR-6 F - Feedrate..........................................................................PART-4:WADR-6 G Code Descriptions............................................................PART-4:WADR-6 M Code Descriptions.........................................................PART-4:WADR-10 Word Address Sample Program...............................................PART-4:WADR-13
AO-73367
ESSI PROGRAMMING
ESSI Programming ...............................................................................PART-4:ESSI-1 Line and Arc Moves.......................................................................PART-4:ESSI-1 ESSI Auxiliary Functions ..............................................................PART-4:ESSI-2 ESSI Sample Program ..........................................................................PART-4:ESSI-5
PART 5: SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Serial Communications................................................................... PART-5:SERIAL-1 The Communication Port................................................................ PART-5:SERIAL-3 Connecting to RS-232 Devices....................................................... PART-5:SERIAL-5 RS-232 Pin Configuration .............................................................. PART-5:SERIAL-6 RS-232 for Hardware Handshaking ......................................... PART-5:SERIAL-7 RS-232 for Software Handshaking .......................................... PART-5:SERIAL-9 Connecting to RS-422 Devices..................................................... PART-5:SERIAL-11 Character Formats......................................................................... PART-5:SERIAL-13 Handshaking Protocol Specifications........................................... PART-5:SERIAL-13 RTS / CTS Hardware Protocol .............................................. PART-5:SERIAL-13 XON / XOFF Software Protocol............................................ PART-5:SERIAL-14 Special Handshaking Protocols.............................................. PART-5:SERIAL-15 Communication Enhancement Feature......................................... PART-5:SERIAL-15 Load- From RS-232 Using RTS / CTS .................................. PART-5:SERIAL-15 Typical Load- From RS232 Using XON / XOFF .................. PART-5:SERIAL-16 CAD Link (CLINK) Protocol....................................................... PART-5:SERIAL-17 File Data................................................................................. PART-5:SERIAL-17 File Get................................................................................... PART-5:SERIAL-18 File Queue .............................................................................. PART-5:SERIAL-19 File Quit ................................................................................. PART-5:SERIAL-19 Three-Digit Status Codes.............................................................. PART-5:SERIAL-20
PART 6: INSTALLATION AND SETUP

SERVICING THE CONTROL
Back-Up Programs Stored in the 1250 ........................................ PART-6:SERVICE-1 Before Calling the Factory .......................................................... PART-6:SERVICE-2
INSTALLATION AND SETUP

Service Mode Key ..........................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-1 Display Functions ...........................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-2 Power-Up Diagnostics ....................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-2 Service Mode..................................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-3 Service Mode Menu........................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-3 Exit Mode.................................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-3 X / Y Display ...........................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-4 Parts Cut...................................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-4
AO-73367
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Feedrate....................................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-4 System Status ...........................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-4 System Data .............................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-4 Display Variables...................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-33 Memory Display Utilities .............................................................PART-6:INSTAL-36 Show Word ............................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-37 Show Dble..............................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-38 Show Cruw.............................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-38 Show Byte ..............................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-38 Show Crub..............................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-39 Axis Speed .............................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-39 Spd Cal ...................................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-39 Mem Reset .............................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-40 Ref Adjust ..............................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-40 Custom Aux ...........................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-41 Loop Back ..............................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-45 Var Store ................................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-45 System Reset ..........................................................................PART-6:INSTAL-46
TYPICAL SETUP EXAMPLE

Typical Setup Example Description.......................................... PART-6:EXAMPLE-1 Typical Setup Example Quick Reference.................................. PART-6:EXAMPLE-6
PART 7: MACHINE INTERFACE

MACHINE INTERFACE
Relay Card Technical Description............................................. PART-7:MACHINE-1 Line Power Input................................................................. PART-7:MACHINE-1 Lifter.................................................................................... PART-7:MACHINE-1 Power Supply ...................................................................... PART-7:MACHINE-2 Emergency Stop .................................................................. PART-7:MACHINE-2 Plasma Cut Sense ................................................................ PART-7:MACHINE-2 Marker ................................................................................. PART-7:MACHINE-2 Height Disable..................................................................... PART-7:MACHINE-3 Plasma Start......................................................................... PART-7:MACHINE-3 Plasma Stop......................................................................... PART-7:MACHINE-3 DIP Switch .......................................................................... PART-7:MACHINE-3 Interface Card Technical Description........................................ PART-7:MACHINE-4 Power Supply ...................................................................... PART-7:MACHINE-4 Analog Inputs to Interface Card.......................................... PART-7:MACHINE-4 Analog Outputs from Interface Card................................... PART-7:MACHINE-4 Encoder Inputs to Interface Card ........................................ PART-7:MACHINE-4 Encoder Outputs from Interface Card................................. PART-7:MACHINE-4 Digital Inputs to Interface Card .......................................... PART-7:MACHINE-4 Digital Outputs from Interface Card ................................... PART-7:MACHINE-5 Product Specification................................................................. PART-7:MACHINE-6 Physical Environment Operating Limits............................. PART-7:MACHINE-6 Electrical Specifications ..................................................... PART-7:MACHINE-6
AO-73367
PART 8: ERROR MESSAGES

ERROR MESSAGES
Errors from Program Operations .....................................................PART-8:ERROR-1 Run-Time Errors..............................................................................PART-8:ERROR-2 Errors During Serial I/O Operations................................................PART-8:ERROR-3
PART 9
RETROFIT AND INSTALLATION
General Explanation of a CNC Retrofit ....................................PART-9:RETROFIT-1 Mounting the Gear Rack............................................................PART-9:RETROFIT-1 Mounting the Encoder ...............................................................PART-9:RETROFIT-2 Determining Cable Length ........................................................PART-9:RETROFIT-3
PART 10: DRIVES AND CALIBRATION

DRIVES AND CALIBRATION
Servo Drive Adjustments...............................................................PART-10:SERVO-1 1250 Motor Specification ..............................................................PART-10:SERVO-3
PART 11: INDEX
PART 12: DRAWINGS AND SCHEMATICS

DRAWINGS AND SCHEMATICS
Schematics Drawing List for the 1250 ..............................PART-12:SCHEMATICS-1 Spare Parts List for the 1250 .............................................PART-12:SCHEMATICS-2
AO-73367
WARRANTY
WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
All equipment is sold subject to the mutual agreement that it is warranted by the company to be free from defects of material and workmanship but the company shall not be liable for special, indirect or consequential damages of any kind under this contract or otherwise. The companys liability shall be limited exclusively to replacing or repairing without charge, at its factory or elsewhere at its discretion, any material or workmanship defects which become apparent within one year from the date on which the equipment was shipped, and the company shall have no liability for damages of any kind arising from the installation and/or use of the apparatus by anyone. The buyer by the acceptance of the equipment will assume all liability for any damages which may result from its use or misuse by the buyer, his or its employees, or by others. The warranties of the company do not cover, and the company makes no warranty with respect to any defect, failure, deficiency or error which is: (A) (B) Not reported to the company within the applicable warranty period; or Due to misapplication, modification, disassembly, abuse, improper installation by others, abnormal conditions of temperature, dirt, or corrosive matter; or Due to operation, either intentional or otherwise, above rated capacities or in an otherwise improper manner.
(C)
There are no other warranties, express or implied, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
AO-73367
WARRANTY-1
BLANK
OVERVIEW: INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The BURNY 1250 Operator Control System (1250) and the BURNY 1250 Plus Operator Control System (1250+) have identical operating functions and physical layouts. Serial baud rates for the 1250 + have a wider range, going from 110 to 230K baud. The upper front panels have a different appearance but the same controls are in the same places and have the same functions. The two versions of the control differ only in their processor card; the processor card in the BURNY 1250+ operates at much higher speed. This manual covers both versions with drawings for both.
Burny 1250+ Upper Front Panel The BURNY 1250 Operator Control System (1250) is a two-axis (X/Y) numerical control intended for use on a variety of cutting machines. The 1250 has a computer, servo-amplifiers, and machine interface electronics all contained in a single, economical enclosure. The servo drives are high performance PWM amplifiers, which provide superior position and velocity control of the cutting process. The computer and interface electronics are specially designed to withstand the harsh environments of the typical cutting shops. The 1250 has extensive service and diagnostic utilities, which allow many of the operating values to be displayed and modified. In addition, all setup variables (acceleration rates, speeds, gains, etc.) are stored in non-volatile memory devices, which retain the values permanently. Programs are entered into the control via the built-in serial port, typically from a host computer or CAD system. A library of STANDARD SHAPES gives the 1250 the ability to load and store various programs in battery-backed NC Program Memory. The 1250 can operate using either an INCH or METRIC operating system. This selection is made during SETUP AND INSTALLATION. All prompts and system variables are displayed in the selected format.
AO-73367
PART-1:INTRO-1
NOTE: In several places, this manual refers to a value that is entered during SETUP AND INSTALLATION. In these cases, consult the INSTALLATION section of the Burny 1250 Operator Control System Operation and Maintenance Manual, AO-73367 for further details.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
As with any tool, sensible care and observation of operating procedures, precautions, and safe practices is required. Failure to observe certain precautions may result in personal injury or damage to the equipment. The following precautions are general guidelines applicable to working with cutting machines. (More explicit precautions are presented in other sections of this manual.)
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
1. Authorize only qualified personnel to perform assigned duties and operate or service the machine. 2. Follow all notices, cautions, and warnings labeled on the machine and in this manual. 3. Never attempt any modifications or addition of any apparatus to the machine without consulting a qualified 1250 representative. 4. Ensure the work area is well ventilated. Fumes, dusts, and mists from certain metals are highly toxic.
MACHINE PRECAUTIONS
1. Use this equipment only for its designed and intended purpose. 2. Establish and adhere to a routine preventive maintenance schedule. 3. Ensure that all electrical ground requirements are met before applying power to the machine. 4. Never attempt any service or maintenance with the system power on.
PART-1:INTRO-2
AO-73367
OVERVIEW: GENERAL OPERATIONS
1250 GENERAL OPERATIONS SUMMARY
OPTIONAL LANGUAGE FEATURE

The 1250 has an alternate language that is available as a feature. Normally, the 1250 prompts in English, but there are other languages that can be installed in the unit: French, German, Finnish, Swedish, Spanish, and Portuguese. When the alternate language feature is enabled, the control uses the new language automatically at powerup. For service personnel and in cases where the translation is not clear, however, the prompts may be changed back to English by pressing <SHF> and then <DSPY>. Perform this sequence again to return to the alternate language.
AXIS DEFINITIONS
Several places in this manual refer to the X and Y axes of the machine. These are defined as: X Axis: The main longitudinal rail axis of the machine. The direction away from you is defined as +X and toward you is -X as you are facing the machine. The cross or traverse axis of the machine. The direction to the left is defined as +Y and to the right as -Y as you are facing the machine.
Y Axis:
APPLYING POWER TO THE MACHINE

There is no power switch on the 1250. When line voltage is connected, power is appled to the computer portion of the 1250.
AO-73367
PART-1:OPER-1
KEYPAD LAYOUT FOR NON-PLUS 1250
1250 X Y
JOG LATCH
DSPY
NC RUN
START CYCLE
SPEED PART RET. SHF

STOP CYCLE
RECYCLE
ENTER
CE
BACK UP
<DSPY>
Press <DSPY> to enter the DISPLAY SELECT MENU function described in the DISPLAY MODES section of the 1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual, AO-73367. Pressing this key does not affect the operation of the machine in any way and so may be used at any time, even while a part is being cut. Once pressed, the current display is removed and the DISPLAY SELECT MENU is presented. Select the desired display (see SCROLLING OPERATIONS). To exit the display mode and resume normal operation, select display DSPY00-EXIT MODE. When this display is selected, the control returns to the operation that was active before the display function was used.
<I>
This special function key is used for manual cutting and several other operations. See the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section of this manual for more information.
<RECYCLE>
Press <RECYCLE> to stop the current operation, turn off all cutting functions, and return to the beginning prompting sequence. It may be pressed at any time or after an operation is complete.
PART-1:OPER-2
AO-73367
Numeric Keypad
When you are instructed to enter values for various selections, use the <0> through <9> numerals, along with the <+/-> and <.> (decimal point). If you need to enter a hexadecimal value (A - F), use a two-key combination of <SHF> as follows: Press <SHF><0> to enter a value of A Press <SHF><1> to enter a value of B Press <SHF><2> to enter a value of C Press <SHF><3> to enter a value of D Press <SHF><4> to enter a value of E Press <SHF><5> to enter a value of F If you need a negative value, first enter the number and then press the <+/-> key to make it negative. If an incorrect value is entered, press the clear entry key <CE> to clear the value and enter the correct value. Once the correct value is displayed, press <ENTER> to continue.
<ENTER>
Press <ENTER> to accept information (an entered value or display selection) and continue.
Up and Down Scroll Arrow Keys

Use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys, located below (and on the right side of) the display, to scroll through a displayed menu. The LED located just below and to the left of the arrow keys lights when a menu of choices is available, and shows that the scroll arrow keys may be used to make the selection. Some menus use numbers to further identify each item. You can then either scroll to the desired selection or enter the appropriate number. When the correct selection is displayed, press <ENTER> to accept the selection and continue.
<SPEED>
The 1250 contains a speedpot, which provides infinite adjustments of machine speed, between zero (0) and the maximum speed of the drive. Select the maximum limits for the speedpot through a three-position range switch, as follows:

Choose HIGH SPEED when you want 0 - 100% of the maximum speed. Choose LOW SPEED when you want 0 - 50% of the maximum speed.
AO-73367
PART-1:OPER-3
Choose ZERO SPEED when you want to stop machine motion without pressing the <CYCLE STOP> key.
The 1250 also has a programmable feedrate option, which allows the feedrate to be controlled from the part program. The feedrate option must be enabled in SD62-SYS CONFG2 (see INSTALLATION AND SETUP section of the 1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual, AO-73367). You can then control the cutting speed while operating by entering a digital feedrate or through programming by inserting feedrate commands in the part program. The traverse speed (used to get from one cut to the next) is preset during installation. This allows the feedrate to be set at a slow rate of speed during the cutting process and still move at a high rate of speed to get from one part to the next. Press <SPEED> or select DSPY03 to display the current feedrate. You may then alter the programmed value by either scrolling or entering the new feedrate on the keypad. Press <ENTER> to continue. Press <SPEED> again to return to normal prompting.
<SHF>
The <SHF> key is always used in combination with another keystroke, as described in other sections.
<CE>
Press the <CE> key to clear an incorrect entry. The correct data may then be entered.
Jog Controls
In order to help position the machine, the 1250 provides a front panel jog function. Press any of the four jog arrow keys to initiate the jog operation. The machine jogs in the selected direction, at cutting speed, as long as the arrow key is pressed. When you release the arrow key, the jog decelerates to a stop. You may initiate a high speed jog (traverse speed) by pressing <SHF> before you choose the jog direction. The machine then moves at the maximum traverse speed regardless of the feedrate setting (unless the feedrate is set to 0.00, which causes the machine to stop). The scroll LED will flash, indicating the high speed jog mode. Press <SHF> again to return to the normal jog mode, or it will cancel automatically after two seconds. In the middle of the four jog arrow keys is <JOG LATCH>. This allows the machine to continue to move in a selected direction without holding in the jog arrow key. Press <JOG LATCH> and, within two seconds, press one of the four jog arrow keys. The machine moves in the selected direction at cutting speed. Press <0>, <STOP>, or <RECYCLE> to stop movement. The latched jog feature may be disabled with SD62-SYSCONFG2. See the 1250 Operation aND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, AO-73367. Also, the high speed jog is not available with a latched jog.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP section of
NOTE:
PART-1:OPER-4
AO-73367
<NC RUN>
The LED on <NC RUN> should always be on. If it is off, the machine stops cutting and performing other functions. You may use the JOG keys, but cannot perform other operations. Press <NC RUN> to toggle the LED to on.
<PART RETURN>
This key is used only when you have selected a program for running. Press the <PART RETURN> key to return to one of three starting positions on a part, in cases where the cut was lost or must be re-done over a portion of the part. One press returns to the most recent pierce point. Two presses returns to the start point of the current part. Three presses returns to the home position on the selected cutting table. Press <SHF> <PART RETURN> to return to the Table #1 0,0 home reference position.
<BACK UP>
Press and hold the <BACK UP> key to stop the cutting process and retrace the cut path in reverse. Once you reach the point where you want to re-start a lost cut, release the <BACK UP> key. The program will continue from that point.
<CYCLE START>
Press <CYCLE START> to start machine motion for automatic cutting or when prompted.
<CYCLE STOP>
Press <CYCLE STOP> to stop machine motion for automatic cutting, before pressing <BACK UP>, or when prompted.
<LIFTER>
When needed, this switch allows you to raise and lower torches with the motorized lifter.
<CLUTCH>
The <CLUTCH> switch is wired to the motor connectors on the back of the 1250. Use this switch when you need control of the machine clutches, which are used to disengage the axes motors from the machine.
<E-STOP>
The <E-STOP> button, located on the side of the 1250, stops drive motion and removes power from cutting relays. It is intended for an emergency only.
AO-73367
PART-1:OPER-5
NOTE: Activating the <E-STOP> does not remove power from the computer portion of the 1250. This allows you to unlatch the <E-STOP> and continue cutting operations with no loss of X/Y position or program block location. If power is lost, the computer in the 1250 loses power and all position data are lost.
PART-1:OPER-6
AO-73367
OPERATIONS: MENU
MAIN FUNCTION SELECTION MENU
The FUNCTION SELECTION MENU is the starting point for all machine operations. At any time, during any operation, you can press the <RECYCLE> key to abort the current operation and return to this top level of prompting. When you press the <RECYCLE> key, the display sequences through:
SELECT--FUNCTION RUN- PROGRAM USE SCROLL--- TO SELECT
The RUN PROGRAM function is the default when power is applied to the 1250. The default function then becomes the last function used. Select other functions by using the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys or by pressing the appropriate number associated with that function. The selections are as follow: 1 2 3 4 6 7 . +/3 SHF RUN- PROGRAM LOAD- STD. SHAPE LOAD- FROM RS-232 STORE- TO RS-232 DELETE- PROGRAM EDIT / NEW- PROGRAM STORE TO FLOPPY LOAD FROM FLOPPY LOAD/RUN RS-232 Runs the current program Loads a program from the STANDARD
SHAPE LIBRARY
Loads a program from an RS-232 device Stores a program to an RS-232 device Deletes a program from NC Program Memory Creates or edits a program in NC Program Memory Stores a program to a floppy drive. Feature must be enabled. Loads a program from a floppy drive. Feature must be enabled. Two key sequence; press <3> and then <SHF>. Loads and immediately runs a program from an RS-232 device.
+/- SHF
LOAD/RUN FROM FLOPPY Two key sequence; press <+/-> and then <SHF>. Loads and immediately runs a program from a floppy drive. Feature must be enabled.
These function selections are described in the sections that follow.
AO-73367
PART-2:MENU-1
RUN PROGRAM
When you select this function, the screen displays the prompt PRGM=00000000. Enter a different program number via the numeric keypad or use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll through part numbers in NC Program Memory. Press <ENTER> to select the program number. The 1250 then searches NC Program Memory for a part that has been assigned that program number. If the part program exists, the run prompting begins. See RUNNING THE PROGRAM. If the part program is not found, an error message (PGM NOT FOUND) is displayed, and the program selection must be repeated.
LOAD- FROM STD SHAPE

When you select this function, the screen displays the prompt PRGM=00000000. Enter a program number (up to eight digits) that will be assigned to your part program and press <ENTER>. Then select the desired shape from the menu that is displayed, either by entering the number directly, or by using the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll to the desired shape. Once the shape has been selected and all data have been entered, the shape is assigned your part program number and placed in NC Program Memory. The STANDARD SHAPE LIBRARY contains 53 generic shapes to choose from. See the STANDARD SHAPE SELECTION section for further details.
LOAD- FROM RS-232

When you select this function, the screen displays the prompt PRGM=00000000. Enter a program number (up to eight digits) that will be assigned to your part program and press <ENTER> to start the loading process from the serial port to the 1250 NC Program Memory. If the selected program number is not already assigned in NC Program Memory, you will be prompted for additional information pertaining to serial communications. (See SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS for further information.) If the program number is already assigned in NC Program Memory, an error message (DUP PGM=########) is displayed. Either enter a different number or leave this function, delete the existing program, and return to the LOAD operation.
STORE- FROM RS-232

When you select this function, the screen displays the prompt PRGM=00000000. Enter a program number (up to eight digits) that will be assigned to your part program and press <ENTER> to start the store process from 1250 NC Program Memory, out the serial port, to a host storage device.
PART-2:MENU-2
AO-73367
OPERATIONS: MENU
DELETE- PROGRAM
When you select this function, the screen displays the prompt PRGM=00000000. Enter the program number of the part to be deleted, either by entering the number directly from the numeric keypad, or by using the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll to the program number in NC Program Memory. Press <ENTER> to delete the program. You can delete all programs in NC Program Memory by entering the program number 00000000. When you press <ENTER>, the prompt YES ERASE ALL NO is displayed to make sure that is what you want to do. Press the <+/-> key to toggle between the flashing YES and NO. To abort the delete operation, make sure NO is flashing and then press <ENTER>. The control aborts the erase procedure and no programs are deleted. To erase all the programs, make sure YES is flashing and then press <ENTER>. Since this operation is irreversible, another prompt NO YOU SURE YES is displayed. Press the <+/-> key to toggle between the flashing YES and NO. This minimizes the chances of an accidental erasure. If you select YES and press <ENTER>, the programs are erased, and the screen displays PROGRAMS DELETED.
EDIT/NEW- PROGRAM
The EDIT/NEW function allows you to edit a part program that resides in NC Program Memory. You can also use the EDIT/NEW function to create a new part. See the EDITOR section for further information.
STORE- TO FLOPPY
Use STORE- TO FLOPPY to save a part program to an external portable floppy drive connected to the serial port. See FLOPPY DRIVE in the UTILITIES section for additional information.
LOAD- FROM FLOPPY

Use LOAD- FROM FLOPPY to load part programs from an external portable floppy drive connected to the serial port. See FLOPPY DRIVE in the UTILITIES section for additional information.
LOAD/RUN RS-232
Use LOAD/RUN RS-232 to load a part program from the serial port to NC Program Memory, and immediately run that part program. It can also automatically delete the program after it has been cut and reload the next. See LOAD- FROM RS-232.
AO-73367
PART-2:MENU-3
LOAD/RUN FROM FLOPPY

Use LOAD/RUN FROM FLOPPY to load a part program from a floppy to NC Program Memory and immediately run that part program. See LOAD FROM FLOPPY.
PART-2:MENU-4
AO-73367
OPERATIONS: STANDARD SHAPES
STANDARD SHAPE SELECTION
SHAPE SELECTION
The LOAD- FROM STD. SHAPE function allows you to select a generic part from the STANDARD SHAPE LIBRARY and create a part program. Press <ENTER>. The display changes to LOAD- 00000000. Enter a part program number that will be used to store the part you create in NC Program Memory. Once a program number is entered, the shape selection process begins. The 1250 shape library contains 53 shape programs, which are referenced by shape number. You must first select the desired shape from the following chart, either by using the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll to the shape, or by entering the desired number directly. Once the correct number and name are displayed, press <ENTER> to select the shape. Detailed drawings of each shape are located at the end of this section. These give additional information about the various options for each shape and illustrate the required dimension inputs. The STANDARD SHAPE programs are written in a GENERIC format, which describes the shape of the part, but leaves the part dimensions variable. Once you select the shape, you are required to answer a series of prompts that determine the final dimensions of the part. The individual shape drawings at the end of this section help to illustrate the various dimensions. These drawings should be referred to when answering the various prompts. If a dimension is requested, use the numeric keypad along with the decimal point. (Use <CE> to clear the entry if you make a mistake.) Once it is correct, press <ENTER>. Since the 1250 can operate in either a metric or inch system, the standard units for the dimensions are those selected for the operating system during installation by SD60. The dimensions can be entered in either unit, however, by using a special key sequence. In this way, an occasional metric part can be entered directly even though the system is set for inch units. To enter a dimension in the opposite unit from the system default, press <SHF> first. The displayed value is converted to the opposite unit and the number of decimal places changes (two for inch: 0.00 and one for millimeters: 0.0). Pressing the same key again changes the value back to the original unit. This key only changes the value being entered and does not switch the units for the entire system. Each dimension must be converted individually as required. If a count (such as number of holes) or other integer value is requested, use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number. Once the value is correct, press <ENTER>. If a selection such as CW/CCW, YES/NO, etc., is requested, the displayed response may be toggled by using the +/-> key. Press <ENTER> when the correct response is displayed. If a start point or repeat direction is requested, use the outside row of keys on the numeric keypad to indicate the correct corner or direction. Once the correct direction is indicated on the readout, press <ENTER>. Invalid entries for a particular prompt are ignored.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-1
Start point or repeat directions are as follows:

Top / left: use the <1> key Top / up: use the <2> key Top / right: use the <3> key Left: use the <4> key Right: use the <6> key Bottom / left: use the <7> key Bottom / down: use the <8> key Bottom / right: use the <9> key
Once all the prompts are answered, a verification prompt is displayed (YES+ VERIFY +NO). To verify the input data, which starts the prompting over again, press <+/-> one time to cause the YES to begin flashing. Then press <ENTER> to review the input data. Use the <ENTER> key to step through the prompts, and correct any values as needed. After all prompts have been answered correctly, the 1250 creates the part program. The following prompts are displayed: * COMPUTING * PROGRAM LOADED (The input data is being processed.) (The program has been created.)
Press <RECYCLE> to return to the MAIN FUNCTION MENU. Go to RUNNING THE PART in this manual for directions on running the program.
DIMENSIONS COMMON TO MOST SHAPES

In addition to the actual dimensions of the part, most of the 53 shape programs also prompt for kerf, scrap, lead-in, and lead-out. Since all controls are equipped with an optional DIAL-IN-KERF feature, the value of 0.00 should be entered for the kerf prompt during the dimension entry (see exceptions below). By entering 0.00 at this point, the DIAL-IN-KERF feature can be used when the part is actually cut to enter and adjust the kerf dimension as needed. If a kerf value other than 0.00 is entered during the dimension prompting of a standard shape, it is permanently added to the part dimensions, and the DIAL-IN-KERF feature is by-passed when the part is cut. Consequently, the kerf cannot be adjusted and the entire part must be re-entered to change it. Most of the standard shapes also prompt for a scrap dimension, which is the space left between successive rows of parts. Since the DIAL-IN-KERF feature does not increase the part-to-part spacing, the SCRAP value must allow for enough material to accommodate the anticipated KERF plus the desired amount of actual material to be left between the rows of parts.
PART-2:SHAPES-2
AO-73367
NOTE: On any CHAIN CUT parts, such as WEDGE PAIR or CHAIN RECTANGLE, the kerf must be entered along with the part dimensions during program creation. This is due to the common side cutting and nesting which is done on these parts. Regardless of the kerf entered, the DIAL-IN-KERF will not function on these parts. The SCRAP value provides the spacing between parts as they are repeated down the plate. The accuracy of this scrap dimension is just as good as the actual part itself; therefore the value can be set fairly small with good results. Typical SCRAP values can be anywhere between .1 inch to .5 inch (2.5 millimeters to 12 millimeters). Note that the SCRAP dimension must allow for the anticipated cutting kerf if the DIAL-IN-KERF feature is to be used when the part is cut. The LEAD-IN dimension is the distance from the part to the pierce point. Since the piercing operation is sometimes unpredictable, the lead-in dimension should be set so that the plate is pierced and the cut has stabilized before it reaches the actual part. Normal values range from .25 inch to 1.00 inch (6 millimeters to 25 millimeters). The LEAD-OUT dimension causes the torch to cut away from the part before the cutting oxygen is turned off. This prevents any damage to the cut part due to the bleed-off characteristics of the torch. In addition, on heavy plate cutting, the LEAD-OUT move guarantees that the bottom of the part has been cut completely before the oxygen is turned off. Normal values are from .5 inch to 1.00 inch (12 millimeters to 25 millimeters).
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-3
53 STANDARD SHAPES
1 * 2 * 3 * 4 5 6 7
8**
10
11 * * * 18
12
13***
14 * * * 21
15
16
17
19
20
22***
23***
24***
25***
26***
27***
28***
29***
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43**
44**
45***
46***
47
48
49 * * *
50***
SHAPES 51, 52, AND 53 ARE ENHANCED VERSIONS OF SHAPES 1, 2, AND 3 * ** SELECTABLE START POSITION, CW/CCW CUTTING, AND SELECTABLE REPEAT MODE AND DIRECTION. ALLOWS SELECTION OF ANY NUMBER OF HOLES.
*** DASHED HOLES ARE OPTIONAL. CORNER RADIUS VALUES MAY BE SET TO 0 FOR SHARP CORNERS.
PART-2:SHAPES-4
AO-73367
SHAPE 1 : RECTANGLE
4
REPEAT PATTERNS AUTO MANUAL
7 6 5
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
CUT DIRECTION STARTING POSITION X DIMENSION Y DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION LEAD-IN ANGLE (DEGS) LEAD-OUT DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION REPEAT MODE
: : : : : : : : : :
(Clockwise or Counter-clockwise) (1 of 4 corners) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (0 to 90 degrees) (Inches or millimeters) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Width of cutting tool path) (Automatic or manual positioning)
IF AUTO REPEAT MODE: 11. VERIFY- YES/NO 12. VERIFY- YES/NO
IF MANUAL REPEAT MODE: 11. Repeat direction: (1 of 4 sides)
NOTES:
The STARTING CORNER and REPEAT DIRECTION parameters can be directly entered with the numeric keypad. Direction arrows are provided for quick reference. When defining the LEAD-IN ANGLE, 0 degrees is parallel to the Y axis and 90 degrees is parallel to the X axis. The LEAD-OUT position is determined by the direction of the cut. It is either parallel to the last side cut (as shown) or 45 degrees from the last cut direction. When running the resulting NC part program, position the torches at the STARTING CORNER of the first part, regardless of the REPEAT MODE selected. From this corner, the program moves out to the actual pierce point.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-5
SHAPE 2 : CIRCLE
REPEAT PATTERNS AUTO
1
MANUAL
PLATE SIDE LEFT RIGHT
2 5
60 DEGREE ANGLE TO CENTERS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. CUT DIRECTION (OD) STARTING POSITION DIAMETER DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION LEAD-OUT DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION REPEAT MODE : : : : : : : : (Clockwise or counter-clockwise) (1 of 8 points) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Width of cutting tool path) (Automatic or manual positioning)
IF AUTO REPEAT MODE: 9. VERIFY- YES/NO
IF MANUAL REPEAT MODE: 9. Repeat direction: (1 of 4 points) 10. VERIFY- YES/NO NOTES:
The STARTING POSITION and REPEAT DIRECTION parameters can be directly entered with the numeric keypad. Direction arrows are provided for quick reference. The actual LEAD-OUT position is determined by the direction of the cut. The figure above shows the LEAD-OUT position assuming a clockwise cutting direction has been selected. When running the resulting NC part program, position the torches at the CENTER of the first part, regardless of the REPEAT MODE selected. From this position, the program moves out to the actual pierce point. When performing AUTO REPEAT mode operations, parts are shifted to the left and right at a 60 degree angle to minimize the amount of scrap between parts.
PART-2:SHAPES-6
AO-73367
SHAPE 3 : RING
REPEAT PATTERNS
AUTO PLATE SIDE LEFT RIGHT
MANUAL
2 6
5
1. CUT DIRECTION (OD) 2. STARTING POSITION 3. INNER DIAMETER SIZE 4. OUTER DIAMETER SIZE 5. LEAD-IN DIMENSION 6. LEAD-OUT DIMENSION 7. SCRAP DIMENSION 8. KERF DIMENSION 9. REPEAT MODE IF AUTO REPEAT MODE: 10. VERIFY- YES/NO : : : : : : : : :
60 degree angle to centers (Clockwise or counter-clockwise) (1 of 8 points) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Width of cutting tool path) (Automatic or manual positioning) IF MANUAL REPEAT MODE: 10. Repeat direction: (1 of 4 points) 11. VERIFY- YES/NO NOTES:
The CUT DIRECTION prompt defines the outer diameter cut direction. The inner direction is always opposite so that the same KERF side (LEFT/RIGHT) can be used for both cuts. The STARTING POSITION and REPEAT DIRECTION parameters can be directly entered with the numeric keypad. The actual LEAD-OUT position is determined by the direction of the cut. The figure above shows the LEAD-OUT position assuming a clockwise cutting direction has been selected. When running the resulting NC part program, position the torches at the CENTER of the first part, regardless of the REPEAT MODE selected. When performing AUTO REPEAT mode operations, parts are shifted to the left and right at a 60 degree angle.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-7
SHAPE 4 : CHAIN RECTANGLE 1

REPEAT PATTERNS
4
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
X DIMENSION Y DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Width of cutting tool path) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
All chain cut parts start from the plate corner closest to the operator. The PLATE SIDE is defined through SYSTEM SETUP DATA.
PART-2:SHAPES-8
AO-73367
0 OPERATIONS: STANDARD SHAPES
SHAPE 5 : CHAIN RECTANGLE 2
REPEAT PATTERNS
4
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
1
4 3 3 4
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
: : : : : :
NOTES:

All chain cut parts start from the plate corner closest to the operator. The PLATE SIDE is defined through SYSTEM SETUP DATA. The part cutting order also depends on the PLATE SIDE value. The part closest to the corner of the plate is always cut first, as shown under REPEAT PATTERNS. Although the REPEAT PATTERN creates parts in pairs to minimize scrap and reduce cutting time, each part is individually counted when cut.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-9
SHAPE 6 : CHAIN CIRCLE

REPEAT PATTERNS
3
1 3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
DIAMETER DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Width of cutting tool path) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
All chain cut parts start from the plate corner closest to the operator. The PLATE SIDE is defined through SYSTEM SETUP DATA.
PART-2:SHAPES-10
AO-73367
SHAPE 7 : RIP MODE

REPEAT PATTERNS PLATE SIDE LEFT RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
: : : : : :
NOTES:

This part is designed for use with multiple torches. All RIP MODE cuts start at the corner of the plate closest to the operator. The PLATE SIDE is defined through SYSTEM SETUP DATA. The cutting sequence also depends on the PLATE SIDE value. After moving away from the corner, a cut is made back towards the corner, as shown under REPEAT PATTERNS.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-11
SHAPE 8 : FLANGE
REPEAT PATTERNS
8
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
INNER DIAMETER SIZE OUTER DIAMETER SIZE BOLT CENTER DIAMETER BOLT HOLE DIAMETER NUMBER OF BOLTS KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Count, 0 to 99) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:

If an INNER DIAMETER of 0 is defined, no center hole is cut. If the NUMBER OF BOLTS is defined as 0, no bolt holes are cut. Only the INNER DIAMETER and the OUTER DIAMETER cuts use the LEADIN DIMENSION as the diameter of the circular lead-in. The lead-in distance for the bolt holes is automatically set to 1/2 of the BOLT HOLE DIAMETER value.
PART-2:SHAPES-12
AO-73367
SHAPE 9 : SPLIT RING

REPEAT PATTERNS
4
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
3 2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
INNER DIAMETER SIZE OUTER DIAMETER SIZE SPLIT DEGREES LEAD-IN DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Degrees (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (YES or NO)
NOTES:

The starting position is always at the 45 degree position as shown. The ending position is determined by the SPLIT DEGREES value. The actual spacing between parts is based on the assumption that SPLIT DEGREES is less than 135 degrees. If not, the scrap between parts may be excessive. Therefore smaller arc segments should be cut using shape 10, RING DEGREES..
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-13
SHAPE 10 : RING DEGREES

REPEAT PATTERNS MANUAL REPEAT ALL DIRECTIONS ALLOWED
7 3 1 2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
INSIDE RADIUS SIZE OUTSIDE RADIUS SIZE STARTING DEGREES ENDING DEGREES CROSS REPEAT DISTANCE RAIL REPEAT DISTANCE LEAD-IN DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Degrees) (Degrees) (Y distance to next part) (X distance to next part) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
The STARTING DEGREES and ENDING DEGREES values represent angular position with respect to the Y axis (0 degrees is parallel to the Y axis and 90 degrees is parallel to the X axis). The REPEAT DISTANCE parameters define the distance from the start of one part to the next. These values must be large enough to provide the necessary SCRAP between parts. When running the resulting NC part program, the machine moves from the starting corner to the pierce point defined by the LEAD-IN DIMENSION. The lead-out distance is automatically set to 1/2 of the LEAD-IN DIMENSION.
PART-2:SHAPES-14
AO-73367
SHAPE 11 : STRAIGHT LUG

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 6
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
2 3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION HOLE DIAMETER KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:

If a HOLE DIAMETER of 0 is defined, no center hole is cut. The lead-in distance for the center hole is automatically set to 1/2 of the HOLE DIAMETER value.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-15
SHAPE 12 : LUG FRAME

REPEAT PATTERNS
3 1 6
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION THICKNESS DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : :
NOTES:
The only difference between parts created with LEFT PLATE or RIGHT PLATE enabled occurs in the traverse move to the first pierce point.
PART-2:SHAPES-16
AO-73367
SHAPE 13 : SLANT LUG

3 1 5 9
2 6
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION BOLT HOLE CENTER HOLE DIAMETER SHOULDER HEIGHT RADIUS DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
If a HOLE DIAMETER of 0 is defined, no center hole is cut.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-17
SHAPE 14 : LIFT LUG

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 4 8
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
2 5
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION HOLE DIAMETER SHOULDER HEIGHT RADIUS DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
PART-2:SHAPES-18
AO-73367
SHAPE 15 : WEDGE PAIR

REPEAT PATTERNS
5 3
2
3 4 3 4
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION BEVEL LENGTH KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (YES or NO)
NOTES:

If a BEVEL LENGTH of 0 is defined, no bevel is cut at the corners. Only sharp, 90 degree corners are cut. This shape creates a special 4 part repeat sequence to minimize the amount of scrap. However, any number of parts may be cut since each of the 4 is counted as a separate part.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-19
SHAPE 16 : STRAIGHT PIPE SUPPORT

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 7
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION RADIUS DIMENSION ARC DEPTH KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
PART-2:SHAPES-20
AO-73367
SHAPE 17 : SLANT PIPE SUPPORT

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 8
4 3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
BASE WIDTH HEIGHT DIMENSION TOP WIDTH RADIUS DIMENSION ARC DEPTH KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : :
NOTES:

Like others, this part is cut with the BASE at the upper position. As a result, the prompts used to label the top and sides assume the part is rotated 180 degrees. The only difference between parts created with LEFT PLATE or RIGHT PLATE enabled occurs in the traverse move to the first pierce point.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-21
SHAPE 18 : VERTICAL PROJECTION

REPEAT PATTERNS
7
3 4
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION COLLAR HEIGHT COLLAR WIDTH KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:
PART-2:SHAPES-22
AO-73367
SHAPE 19 : SLANT PROJECTION

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
PLATE SIDE
LEFT
RIGHT
3 4 5
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
BASE WIDTH HEIGHT DIMENSION COLLAR HEIGHT COLLAR WIDTH TOP WIDTH KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : :
NOTES:

AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-23
SHAPE 20 : VERTICAL SLOT

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
PLATE SIDE
LEFT
RIGHT
3 4
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION COLLAR HEIGHT COLLAR WIDTH KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:
PART-2:SHAPES-24
AO-73367
SHAPE 21 : SLANT SLOT

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
PLATE SIDE
LEFT
RIGHT
2 3 4 5
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
BASE WIDTH HEIGHT DIMENSION COLLAR HEIGHT COLLAR WIDTH TOP WIDTH KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : :
NOTES:

AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-25
SHAPE 22 : OCTAGON
REPEAT PATTERNS
1
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
7 2
4 3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION HOLE DIAMETER BEVEL LENGTH KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:
PART-2:SHAPES-26
AO-73367
SHAPE 23 : SQUARE, CORNER RADIUS IN

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
7 2 4
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION HOLE DIAMETER ARC RADIUS KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-27
SHAPE 24 : SQUARE, CORNER RADIUS OUT

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
7 2
4 3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION HOLE DIAMETER ARC RADIUS KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:
PART-2:SHAPES-28
AO-73367
SHAPE 25 : SQUARE WITH HOLE

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 6
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION HOLE DIAMETER KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : :
NOTES:
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-29
SHAPE 26 : OCTAGONAL FRAME

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
LEFT
PLATE SIDE
9 2 5 6 3 4
RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
OUTSIDE WIDTH OUTSIDE HEIGHT INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE HEIGHT INSIDE RADIUS BEVEL LENGTH KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : :
NOTES:
PART-2:SHAPES-30
AO-73367
SHAPE 27 : FRAME, CORNER RADIUS IN

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
9 2 4
5 6 3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
OUTSIDE WIDTH OUTSIDE HEIGHT INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE HEIGHT INSIDE RADIUS ARC RADIUS KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : :
NOTES:
The only difference between parts created with LEFT PLATE or RIGHT PLATE enabled occurs in the traverse move to the first pierce point, as shown.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-31
SHAPE 28 : FRAME, CORNER RADIUS OUT

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
PLATE SIDE LEFT

9
RIGHT
6 3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
OUTSIDE WIDTH OUTSIDE HEIGHT INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE HEIGHT INSIDE RADIUS ARC RADIUS KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : :
NOTES:
PART-2:SHAPES-32
AO-73367
SHAPE 29 : SQUARE FRAME

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 8
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
OUTSIDE WIDTH OUTSIDE HEIGHT INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE HEIGHT INSIDE RADIUS KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : :
NOTES:
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-33
SHAPE 30 : RECTANGULAR FRAME

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 7
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
OUTSIDE WIDTH OUTSIDE HEIGHT INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE HEIGHT KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:
PART-2:SHAPES-34
AO-73367
SHAPE 31 : UNIVERSAL FRAME

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 5 6 2 8 4 14 11 17 15 9 10 16 20 7
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION SYMMETRY BOTTOM THICKNESS LEFT THICKNESS TOP THICKNESS RIGHT THICKNESS B-LEFT INNER RADIUS T-LEFT INNER RADIUS T-RIGHT INNER RADIUS B-RIGHT INNER RADIUS BEVEL CORNERS CONVEX B-LEFT OUTER RADIUS T-LEFT OUTER RADIUS T-RIGHT OUTER RADIUS B-RIGHT OUTER RADIUS KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
EXAMPLE SHAPES (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO) (YES or NO) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:

When SYMMETRY:YES is selected, values for THICKNESS, INNER RADIUS and OUTER RADIUS are automatically pre-loaded to define a symmetrical part. The CONVEX prompt line only appears when BEVEL CORNERS:NO is selected.
SHAPE 32 : RECTANGULAR HOLE
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-35
REPEAT PATTERNS MANUAL REPEAT

1 3 2
ALL DIRECTIONS ALLOWED
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION CORNER RADIUS X MOVE DISTANCE Y MOVE DISTANCE KERF DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Rail distance to next hole) (Cross distance to next hole) (Width of cutting tool path) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
The X and Y MOVE DISTANCE values are used to define the "center to center" distance between holes. From this center position, the program moves the machine to the pierce point determined by the LEAD-IN DIMENSION. LEAD-IN DIMENSION must be less than the WIDTH DIMENSION. For the first hole, the torch should be positioned to center of the hole by the operator.
PART-2:SHAPES-36
AO-73367
SHAPE 33 : VERTICAL HOLE

1
REPEAT PATTERNS MANUAL REPEAT ALL DIRECTIONS ALLOWED
2 6
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
SLOT WIDTH SLOT HEIGHT X MOVE DISTANCE Y MOVE DISTANCE KERF DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Rail distance to next hole) (Cross distance to next hole) (Width of cutting tool path) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
The X and Y MOVE DISTANCE values are used to define the "center to center" distance between holes. From this center position, the program moves the machine to the pierce point determined by the LEAD-IN DIMENSION. LEAD-IN DIMENSION must be less than SLOT WIDTH. For the first hole, the torch should be positioned to center of the hole by the operator.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-37
SHAPE 34 : HORIZONTAL HOLE

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
SLOT WIDTH SLOT HEIGHT X MOVE DISTANCE Y MOVE DISTANCE KERF DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Rail distance to next hole) (Cross distance to next hole) (Width of cutting tool path) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
The X and Y MOVE DISTANCE values are used to define the center to center distance between holes. From this center position, the program moves the machine to the pierce point determined by the LEAD-IN DIMENSION. LEAD-IN DIMENSION must be less than the SLOT HEIGHT. For the first hole, the torch should be positioned to center of the hole by the operator.
PART-2:SHAPES-38
AO-73367
SHAPE 35 : CIRCULAR HOLE

1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
DIAMETER DIMENSION X MOVE DISTANCE Y MOVE DISTANCE KERF DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Rail distance to next hole) (Cross distance to next hole) (Width of cutting tool path) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
The X and Y MOVE DISTANCE values are used to define the center to center distance between holes. From this center position, the program moves the machine to the pierce point determined by the LEAD-IN DIMENSION. LEAD-IN DIMENSION must be less than the DIAMETER DIMENSION. For the first hole, the torch should be positioned to center of the hole by the operator.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-39
SHAPE 36 : BEAM SUPPORT

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
PLATE SIDE
9 4 3
LEFT
RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
BASE WIDTH TOP WIDTH HEIGHT DIMENSION LEFT SHOULDER RIGHT SHOULDER LEFT OFFSET KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : :
NOTES:

Like others, this part is cut with the BASE at the upper position. As a result, the prompts used to label the top and sides assume the part is rotated 180 degrees. The only difference between parts created with LEFT PLATE or RIGHT PLATE enabled occurs in the traverse move to the first pierce point, as shown.
PART-2:SHAPES-40
AO-73367
SHAPE 37 : TRUSS SUPPORT

1 4 7
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
BASE WIDTH TOP WIDTH HEIGHT DIMENSION SHOULDER HEIGHT KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:

AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-41
SHAPE 38 : ANGULAR TRUSS

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 3 6
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
BASE WIDTH HEIGHT DIMENSION SHOULDER HEIGHT KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : :
NOTES:

Like others, this part is cut with the BASE at the upper position. The only difference between parts created with LEFT PLATE or RIGHT PLATE enabled occurs in the traverse move to the first pierce point, as shown.
PART-2:SHAPES-42
AO-73367
SHAPE 39 : TRIANGLE
REPEAT PATTERNS
1 6
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
3
: : : : : : : (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
BASE WIDTH HEIGHT DIMENSION LEFT OFFSET KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
NOTES:

Like others, this part is cut with the BASE at the upper position. However the LEFT OFFSET is actually on the left side of the part as shown. When LEFT OFFSET is greater than 0, angle "A" is greater than 90 degrees and when it is less than 0, angle "A" is less than 90 degrees. The only difference between parts created with LEFT PLATE or RIGHT PLATE enabled occurs in the traverse move to the first pierce point, as shown.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-43
SHAPE 40 : BEVELED RECTANGLE

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
PLATE SIDE
7 3 4
LEFT
RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
BASE WIDTH TOP WIDTH LEFT HEIGHT RIGHT HEIGHT KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:

PART-2:SHAPES-44
AO-73367
SHAPE 41 : TRAPEZOID
REPEAT PATTERNS
1 7 A
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
BASE WIDTH TOP WIDTH HEIGHT DIMENSION LEFT OFFSET KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:
Like others, this part is cut with the BASE at the upper position and the TOP at the lower position. However the LEFT OFFSET is actually on the left side of the part as shown. When LEFT OFFSET is greater than 0, angle "A" is greater than 90 degrees and when it is less than 0, angle "A" is less than 90 degrees. The only difference between parts created with LEFT PLATE or RIGHT PLATE enabled occurs in the traverse move to the first pierce point, as shown.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-45
SHAPE 42 : QUAD SIDE

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 10
3 7 2 5
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
BASE WIDTH TOP WIDTH TOP OFFSET LEFT HEIGHT LEFT OFFSET RIGHT HEIGHT RIGHT OFFSET KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:

PART-2:SHAPES-46
AO-73367
SHAPE 43 : LAP JOINT

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 9
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION NUMBER OF COLUMNS COLUMN DISTANCE BOLT HOLE DISTANCE BOLT HOLE DIAMETER KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Count, 0 to 99) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:

The hole pattern defined is automatically centered on the part from top to bottom and left to right. To create a part with a single row of holes, use shape number 44, SLOTTED PLATE, with a SLOT HEIGHT equal to the SLOT WIDTH.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-47
SHAPE 44 : SLOTTED PLATE

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 9
LEFT
PLATE SIDE RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION NUMBER OF SLOTS SLOT WIDTH SLOT HEIGHT SLOT DISTANCE KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Count, 0 to 99)1 (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO)
NOTES:
The slot pattern defined is automatically centered on the part from top to bottom and left to right.
PART-2:SHAPES-48
AO-73367
SHAPE 45 : LAMP BASE

REPEAT PATTERNS
1 5 10 4 7 6 3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION BOLT HOLE DIAMETER X BOLT HOLE CENTER Y BOLT HOLE CENTER CENTER HOLE DIAMETER CORNER RADIUS KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION REPEAT PROMPTING
: : : : : : : : : : :
NOTES:

The hole pattern defined is automatically centered on the part from top to bottom and left to right. If a CENTER HOLE DIAMETER of 0 is defined, no hole is cut. If a CORNER RADIUS of 0 is defined, sharp corners are cut.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-49
SHAPE 46 : CAM
7 6 10 2 3
4 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
WIDTH DIMENSION LEFT RADIUS RIGHT RADIUS LEFT HOLE DIAMETER RIGHT HOLE DIAMETER CENTER DISTANCE LEFT OFFSET KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : : :
NOTES:

If a LEFT HOLE DIAMETER of 0 is defined, no holes are cut in the part. If a RIGHT HOLE DIAMETER of 0 is defined, only the LEFT HOLE is cut.
PART-2:SHAPES-50
AO-73367
SHAPE 47 : "L" BRACKET 1

REPEAT PATTERNS
1
PLATE SIDE
4 3
LEFT
RIGHT
6 2 7
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION VERTICAL THICKNESS HORIZONTAL THICKNESS KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:

All chain cut parts start from the plate corner closest to the operator. The PLATE SIDE is defined through SYSTEM SETUP DATA. Although parts are created in pairs to minimize scrap, each part is individually counted when cut. If part dimensions make it impossible to create part pairs without overlap, use shape 48, "L" BRACKET 2.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-51
SHAPE 48 : "L" BRACKET 2

REPEAT PATTERNS
3
PLATE SIDE LEFT

2 7
RIGHT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
WIDTH DIMENSION HEIGHT DIMENSION VERTICAL THICKNESS HORIZONTAL THICKNESS KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : :
NOTES:

All chain cut parts start from the plate corner closest to the operator. The PLATE SIDE is defined through SYSTEM SETUP DATA. If excessive scrap can be eliminated by creating "part pairs", use shape 47, "L" BRACKET 1.
PART-2:SHAPES-52
AO-73367
SHAPE 49 : BI DAMPER
REPEAT PATTERNS
1 9
P2 P0
PLATE SIDE
8 10
P1
LEFT
RIGHT
4 5 2 3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
CENTER DISTANCE OUTER DIAMETER INNER DIAMETER THICKNESS DIMENSION RADIUS DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION LEAD-IN POINT 1 (P1) LEAD-IN POINT 2 (P2) LEAD-OUT VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO) (YES or NO) (YES or NO) (YES or NO)
NOTES:

If an INNER DIAMETER of 0 is defined, no hole is cut. If LEAD-IN POINT 1 is selected, the prompt for LEAD-IN POINT 2 is not displayed. If NO is selected for both optional LEAD-IN POINTS, then the default LEADIN POINT 0 position is used.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-53
SHAPE 50 : DAMPER
REPEAT PATTERNS
1 8
P0
PLATE SIDE
P1
LEFT
RIGHT
8 4
3 2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
HANDLE CENTER DIST. OUTER DIAMETER INNER DIAMETER THICKNESS DIMENSION RADIUS DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION LEAD-IN POINT 1 (P1) LEAD-OUT VERIFY- YES/NO
: : : : : : : : : : :
(Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Width of cutting tool path) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Inches or millimeters) (YES or NO) (YES or NO) (YES or NO)
NOTES:

If an INNER DIAMETER of 0 is defined, no hole is cut. If NO is selected for the LEAD-IN POINT 1 position prompt, the default LEADIN POINT 0 position is used.
PART-2:SHAPES-54
AO-73367
SHAPE 51 : RECTANGLE
REPEAT PATTERNS AUTO
4
MANUAL
7 6 5
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
CUT DIRECTION STARTING POSITION X DIMENSION Y DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION LEAD-IN ANGLE (DEGS) LEAD-OUT DIMENSION SCRAP DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION REPEAT MODE
: : : : : : : : : :
(Clockwise or counter-clockwise) (1 of 4 corners) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (0 to 90 degrees) (Inches or millimeters) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Width of cutting tool path) (Automatic or manual positioning)
IF MANUAL REPEAT MODE: : 11. Repeat direction: (1 of 4 sides) 12. VERIFY- YES/NO
NOTES:
The STARTING CORNER and REPEAT DIRECTION parameters can be directly entered with the numeric keypad. Direction arrows are provided for quick reference. When defining the LEAD-IN ANGLE, 0 degrees is parallel to the Y axis and 90 degrees is parallel to the X axis. The LEAD-OUT position is determined by the direction of the cut. It is either parallel to the last side cut (as shown) or 45 degrees from the last cut direction. When running the resulting NC part program, position the torches at the corner of the plate, regardless of the REPEAT MODE selected. From this corner, the program moves out to the actual pierce point.
SHAPE 52 : CIRCLE
AO-73367 PART-2:SHAPES-55
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 8. 9. 10.
CUT DIRECTION (OD) STARTING POSITION DIAMETER DIMENSION LEAD-IN DIMENSION LEAD-OUT DIMENSION LEAD-OUT TYPE SCRAP DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION REPEAT MODE
: : : : : : : : :
(Clockwise or counter-clockwise) (1 of 8 corners) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (0 or 1) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Width of cutting tool path) (Automatic or manual positioning)
IF MANUAL REPEAT MODE: : 11. Repeat direction: (1 of 4 points) 12. VERIFY- YES/NO NOTES:
The STARTING CORNER and REPEAT DIRECTION parameters can be directly entered with the numeric keypad. Direction arrows are provided for quick reference. The actual LEAD-OUT position is determined by the direction of the cut. The figure above shows the LEAD-OUT position assuming a clockwise cutting direction has been selected. When running the resulting NC part program, position the torches at the corner of the plate, regardless of the REPEAT MODE selected. From this position, the program moves out to the actual pierce point. When performing AUTO REPEAT mode operations, parts are shifted to the left and right at a 60 degree angle to minimize the amount of scrap between parts.
LEAD-OUT TYPE 0 is 10 degrees to tangent. LEAD-OUT TYPE 1 follows LEAD-IN path.
PART-2:SHAPES-56
AO-73367
SHAPE 53 : RING
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
CUT DIRECTION STARTING POSITION INNER DIAMETER SIZE OUTER DIAMETER SIZE LEAD-IN DIMENSION LEAD-OUT DIMENSION LEAD-OUT TYPE SCRAP DIMENSION KERF DIMENSION REPEAT MODE
: : : : : : : : : :
(Clockwise or counter-clockwise) (1 of 8 points) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (Inches or millimeters) (0 or 1) (Distance between parts, in/mm) (Width of cutting tool path) (Automatic or manual positioning)
IF MANUAL REPEAT MODE: : 11. Repeat direction: (1 of 4 points) 12. VERIFY- YES/NO NOTES:
The CUT DIRECTION prompt defines the outer diameter cut direction. The inner direction is always opposite so that the same KERF side (LEFT/RIGHT) can be used for both cuts. The STARTING POSITION and REPEAT DIRECTION parameters can be directly entered with the numeric keypad. The actual LEAD-OUT position is determined by the direction of the cut. The figure above shows the LEAD-OUT position assuming a clockwise cutting direction has been selected. When running the resulting NC part program, position the torches at the CENTER of the first part, regardless of the REPEAT MODE selected. When performing AUTO REPEAT mode operations, parts are shifted to the left and right at a 60 degree angle. LEAD-OUT TYPE 0 is 10 degrees to tangent. LEAD-OUT TYPE 1 follows LEAD-IN path.
AO-73367
PART-2:SHAPES-57
BLANK
OPERATIONS: RUN
RUNNING A PROGRAM
This section of the manual describes the procedures used to cut the desired shape, which occurs after the shape has been selected and all necessary data entered, or after a new part has been constructed.
PLASMA-OXYGEN/FUEL SELECTION
Most machines equipped with a 1250 only use one type of cutting process, either plasma or oxygen/fuel. In these cases, the system setup parameters can be set so that the correct cutting mode is selected automatically. If the machine has both cutting systems, however, the screen displays the prompt SELECT- PLASMA or SELECT- OXY/FUEL. Use the <+/-> key to toggle the display to the correct type. NOTE: This does not actually switch the cutting function of the machine, only the prompting and relay sequencing used during the part execution. You must ensure that the correct cutting process is enabled on the machine. At this point, the feature codes are checked to see if any optional features are enabled in the 1250. If none are enabled, continue at section DIAL-IN-KERF to select the desired cutting mode. Otherwise, follow the directions that follow for each feature.
GEOMETRY MODIFICATION OPTIONS

There are several features that allow the geometric appearance of a part to be altered: SCALING ROTATION Allows the part size to be magnified up to 65 times or reduced to .001 size. Allows the part to be rotated from its programmed orientation to allow alignment with the plate or nesting among other parts. Allows the part to be mirror-imaged in either the X or Y axis, or both axes.
MIRROR
These operations are enabled with the ENHANCED OPERATION option. When this feature is enabled, the prompt GEOMETRY - NORMAL is displayed when the part is first run. The word NORMAL flashes. Press the <+/-> key to toggle between GEOMETRY - NORMAL and GEOMETRY SPECIAL. Press <ENTER> when you have chosen either NORMAL or SPECIAL.
AO-73367
PART-2:RUN-1
If you select NORMAL and press <ENTER>, the part is cut as it is programmed, which basically means that: SCALE = 1.00 ROTATE = 0.00 DEGREES X MIRROR - NO Y MIRROR - NO
and prompting for SPECIAL GEOMETRY ends. If you select SPECIAL and press <ENTER>, you will be prompted for scale, rotation, X mirror, and Y mirror. Once you run a program with one of the special geometric operations, the display continues to show SPECIAL. You must set the special option back to normal conditions before the display shows NORMAL again.
SCALING
If the SCALING feature is enabled on the system, the control displays the prompt SCALE=XX.XXX. The displayed value is the scale factor used the last time that particular program was run. The scale factor is used to enlarge or reduce the size of the entire part, either to produce a different size, or to allow a test run. The value entered is used as a multiplier for all part dimensions, therefore: If SCALE = 1.000 If SCALE = 10.000 If SCALE = .125 The part is the original 1:1 size, The part is 10 times the original size, and The part is 1/8 the original size.
Scale values may range from 0.001 to 65.000. Enter the desired scale value. Use 1.000 for the original size.
PART ROTATION OPTION

If the PART ROTATION feature is enabled, the control displays the prompt ROTATE+XXX.XX for the desired rotation angle. Enter the desired rotation degrees. 0.00 is the original programmed position. A positive angle indicates a counter-clockwise rotation. A negative angle may also be entered for a clockwise rotation, however it will be converted to its equivalent positive angle position. When the part is run again, the positive equivalent angle is displayed, not the negative. For example, if -45.00 degrees is entered for the rotation, it is stored as +315.00.
X/Y AXIS MIRROR OPTION

If the MIRROR IMAGE feature is enabled, two prompts are displayed. The first is for the X axis: X MIRROR- NO. Press the <+/-> key to toggle between the flashing NO and YES. Press the <ENTER> key when the desired response is shown. If you choose NO, the X axis is cut as programmed. If you choose YES, the X axis is inverted so the part appears upside-down on the plate. After the X mirror selection is entered, the prompt changes to: Y MIRROR-NO. Again, press the <+/-> key to toggle between the flashing NO and YES. Press <ENTER> when the desired response is shown. If you choose NO, the Y axis is cut as programmed. If you choose YES, the Y axis is mirrored from the left to right.
PART-2:RUN-2
AO-73367
OPERATIONS: RUN
KNIFE COMPENSATION OPTION

The KNIFE COMPENSATION feature allows a special swivel knife compensation routine that modifies the cut path to produce sharp corners rather than rounded corners caused by the knife's offset from center.
DIAL-IN-KERF STANDARD FEATURE

The DIAL IN KERF feature allows kerf compensation to be added to the shape to be cut. In order for the prompt to appear, the program must contain a kerf code, such as KERF LEFT or KERF RIGHT (G41 or G42 in Word Address or function 29 or 30 in ESSI). When the program contains such a code, the prompt KERF= +XX.XXXX is displayed. The value that is displayed is the kerf used the last time the part was run. The kerf value to enter is the total width of the path created by the cutting process. This value can be derived by cutting a 4" square with no kerf entered, and then measuring the actual size. The difference between the actual size and the input dimension size is the kerf value. Enter this value as a positive (+) kerf dimension. This alters the cut path and causes the actual piece to have the correct dimensions. A negative kerf value can also be entered, however this is normally not done. If entered, it shrinks the size of the part, rather than increasing it. This can be useful if a part is programmed with too large a kerf in the dimensions. A negative kerf value counteracts the programmed kerf, shrinking the part to the correct size.
CUTTING MODE SELECTION

Once any optional parameters are entered, the 1250 performs the necessary processing and then prompts you to select the desired CUTTING MODE from the following menu:

MANUAL CUT AUTO CUT TEST RUN SINGLE STEP
Each of these cutting modes are described in the sections that follow.
MANUAL CUT
The manual cut mode allows you to preheat and manually start the cutting process, using the machines cutting controls. You will see the display PIERCE = XXX.XX. Enter the desired pierce ramp time, which affects the acceleration of the machine when the cutting process is turned on to pierce the material. If you enter 0.00, the machine waits for the cutting process to be turned on, and then accelerates quickly to the selected cutting speed. This is acceptable for thinner material, since it is pierced almost instantly when the process is turned on. On thicker material, however, it takes a considerable amount of time to burn down through the metal. If the machine moves too fast at this point, the beginning portion of the part will not be cut completely.
AO-73367
PART-2:RUN-3
Entering a pierce ramp time causes the machine to slowly accelerate from the pierce location. The machine starts from its halted position when the process is turned on, and accelerates up to the desired cutting speed in the time entered for the PIERCE RAMP time. By setting this value sufficiently long, the material is pierced during the lead-in portion of the cut so that by the time the machine has reached the actual part, the material is cut all the way through. NOTE: The 1250 can also use the PIERCE RAMP time as a HOLD TIME for oxygen/fuel and/or plasma cutting instead of a PIERCE RAMP time. This allows you to enter a pierce time that causes the machine to hold position instead of starting motion as soon as the cut starts. See SD62 SYSTEM CONFG2, digit 8, in the INSTALLATION AND SETUP chapter.
AUTO CUT
The auto cut mode allows you to cut the part with all preheat and cutting processes being started and stopped by the 1250. Depending on whether oxygen/fuel or plasma cutting is being done, prompts for the values that control the automatic piercing cycle are displayed next. These include PREHEAT, PIERCE RAMP, and PART COUNT. HIGH PREHEAT (OXYGEN/FUEL) If you have selected oxygen/fuel cutting, you are first prompted for the duration of the HIGH PREHEAT cycle. The control displays PREHEAT= XXX.XX. Enter the time in seconds for the HIGH PREHEAT cycle. When the control moves to a new pierce point, it automatically turns on the high preheat solenoids for the time specified. When the preheat cycle is complete, the high preheat solenoids turn off and the cutting oxygen is turned on. PIERCE RAMP (OXYGEN/FUEL OR PLASMA) Regardless of the cutting process, you are prompted for the PIERCE RAMP time. See the description under MANUAL CUT MODE for information on the PIERCE RAMP time. PART COUNT (ALL CUTTING PROCESS) Regardless of the cutting process, you are then prompted for HOW MANY- XXX parts. Enter the desired number of part cycles to produce the required parts. For example, if you want 100 parts and have four torches cutting, enter 25 to get the correct count. If an additional part is required after the preset count is reached. press <CYCLE START> to cut one more part.
TEST RUN
TEST RUN allows the same machine movements as during a cut, however all cutting outputs are prohibited. This is useful to check and correct the position of the part on the material to be cut.
SINGLE STEP
SINGLE STEP mode is similar to TEST RUN, however only one program move is executed each time you press <CYCLE START>. You can then check the dimensions at the end of each data block.
PART-2:RUN-4
AO-73367
OPERATIONS: RUN
CYCLE START
After the desired cutting mode is selected, and the required data (PREHEAT, PIERCE RAMP, etc.) have been entered, press <ENTER> to cut the part. The control now displays the prompt PRESS CYCLE START. If the PLATE ALIGNMENT feature is not enabled in the control, locate the machine at the starting position on the plate (usually the lower corner) before you press <CYCLE START>. This starts program execution. Continue at RUNNING THE PART. PLATE ALIGNMENT FEATURE The PLATE ALIGNMENT feature compensates for plates that are not squared with the cutting machine. Without this option, the plate must be carefully aligned to be parallel with the main rail or else the parts may run off the edge as the cutting progresses down the rail. The PLATE ALIGNMENT feature rotates the part program so it follows the angle of the plate. This not only ensures that the parts cut correctly, but also reduces setup time, since the plate no longer has to be squared to the machine. To perform this alignment, instead of pressing the <CYCLE START> key as the display is prompting, press <SHF> and then <CYCLE STOP>. This two-key combination enters the alignment mode. The display now prompts: MOVE MACHINE TO FIRST CORNER THEN PRESS -1 OR 3 -SAME ANGLE
If you press <3>, the plate angle calculated for the previous part is used. This feature can be used for cutting several different parts on the same plate. The control then displays the prompt: ANGLE= +/- XXX.XX PRESS ENTER IF OK
When you press <ENTER>, the cut process prompting continues. To align to a new plate, the machine should be aligned with one corner of the material. Normally this should be the starting corner for the program, since the machine automatically returns to this location once the procedure is complete. When positioned, press the number <1> key. The display now changes to: MOVE MACHINE TO -SECOND CORNERTHEN PRESS -2
AO-73367
PART-2:RUN-5
Jog the machine along the longer edge of the plate since this produces a more accurate indication of the angle of the plate. If you are cutting a large plate, it is not necessary to go all the way to the next corner. Simply move down either edge at least 10 feet and align the machine to the edge of the plate. Although the procedure works if the distance is less, the result is more accurate if a longer distance is used. After the machine is aligned to the second corner (or along the edge), press the number <2> key. Once these two points are identified, the angle of the plate is calculated and displayed as: ANGLE= +/- XXX.XX PRESS ENTER IF OK
The angle is positive for counter-clockwise angles and negative for clockwise. Press <ENTER> to align to this angle. This sets the displayed angle as the plate alignment value and then returns the machine to the first corner. Once the machine stops, the prompting returns to the cut mode selection (manual, auto, etc.), as described in CUTTING MODE SELECTION. Enter the appropriate selection for the cutting mode and press <ENTER>. The display changes again to prompt for the <CYCLE START> key. It also displays the PLATE ANGLE: PRESS CYCLE GO PLATE ANG= +/- XXX.XX
Press <CYCLE START> key to begin the program. The parts now follow the angle of the plate and cut correctly. While cutting the part, the display shows the current status of the machine. In addition, if a condition is preventing the operation from continuing, a WAIT display is shown along with the condition causing the WAIT. The following is a list of these displays, along with a brief explanation of each: STOP- * E-STOP * CAUTION: STOP- HOLD POS RUN- TEST RUN RUN- VENT XXX.X RUN- TRAVERSE RUN- OXY CUT The EMERGENCY STOP has been activated. This shuts down the 1250 drives. This does not shut off the AC power input. It only disables the drives and cutting functions. The program execution has been stopped. The machine is holding position. The program is executing a test run of the program. The program is running. The OXYGEN BLEEDOFF TIMER is counting down. The machine is holding position. The program is running. The current block is noncutting. The machine is running at high traverse speed. The program is running. The machine is cutting in MANUAL OXYGEN/FUEL MODE. The machines <SPEED> key controls feedrate.
PART-2:RUN-6
AO-73367
OPERATIONS: RUN
RUN- PRHT XXX.X
The program is running. The machine is holding position and AUTO-CUTTING HIGH PREHEAT is in progress. The program is running. The machine is cutting in AUTOMATIC OXYGEN/FUEL MODE. The program is running, but the <BACK UP> key has been pressed, causing the machine to re-trace cut path backward. Speed is limited by setup value. The program is running. The 1250 is holding machine position and waiting for the PROGRAMMED DWELL timer to reach 0 before continuing along the programmed path. The program is running, and cutting is selected. The 1250 is waiting for the cut switch to be turned on before starting to move. (On some systems the cut can be started by pressing the <CYCLE START> key again.) The machine is holding position. The program is running, and cutting is selected. The 1250 has finished one cut, moved to a new pierce location, and is waiting for the cut switch input to be turned off, then back on to start the new cut. The machine is holding position. Motion is being delayed until timer reaches 0. The program is running. Plasma cut is in progress. The feedrate is controlled by the <SPEED> key. The program is running. A PLASMA ARC ON sense has been received. The machine holds position until the timer reaches 0 and then begins moving along cut path. The program is running. Plasma cutting is being done, but the PLASMA ARC ON sense has turned off, probably indicating that the arc has gone out. The machine continues along the cutting path as if the arc were still on, until the timer reaches 0.00. The 1250 then stops the machine and performs a <CYCLE STOP>. The program is running. AUTO CUT was selected and the start signal has been sent to the plasma system. The PLASMA ARC ON input has not yet been received. The program is running. Oxygen/fuel cutting is selected. The torch has just pierced at a new location and is slowly accelerating up to the selected cutting speed based on the entered PIERCE RAMP TIME value. The program is running, but this display occurs for two reasons. If you press <CYCLE STOP> and jog the machine away from the programmed path, and then press <CYCLE START>, this message is displayed until the machine has moved back to the correct position. This message is also displayed if the machine drifts away from the correct position when it is supposed to be
RUN- AUTO OXY CUT RUN- BACKUP
RUN- DWELL XXX.X
WAIT- CUT SW OFF
WAIT- CUT SW ON
WAIT- START XXX RUN- PLASMA CUT RUN- DELAY XXX.X
RUN- ARCOFF XXX.X
RUN- PLASMA START
RUN- PIERCE XXX.X
RUN-RTN TO PATH
AO-73367
PART-2:RUN-7
holding position (waiting for cutting oxygen switch to be turned on). NOTE: If this message is displayed when a program is running, and the machine appears to be stalled, it indicates that the 1250 is unable to return the machine to the correct position. This can occur if there is a large amount of drift in the drives or if there is some kind of mechanical bind or interference.
RUNNING DESCRIPTION
Due to the variations between cutting machines, it is not possible to give an exact description of the operating sequences to be used while running a part. The following descriptions serve to illustrate the various control functions and typical operating sequences. If MANUAL CUT mode is selected, the program moves to the pierce point and waits for you to start the cut. At the end of the cut, the cutting process stops automatically and the machine advances to the next pierce position. When it reaches the new point, the cut switch must be turned off and back on to restart the cut.
For oxygen/fuel cutting, you must manually start the cutting oxygen using the machine's cutting oxygen switch or controls. The 1250 automatically turns the cut off at the end, or you can stop the cut by turning off the machine's cutting oxygen switch. For plasma cutting, you must manually start the plasma cut. This can be done in one of two ways. If the machine is equipped with a separate plasma control station, the cut can be started by pressing the <START> button on the plasma operators console. The plasma cut can also be started manually by pressing the <CYCLE START> key on the 1250. This allows manual cutting to be done on machines that do not have a separate manual control station.
If AUTO CUT is selected, the program advances to a new pierce point and then automatically turns on the cutting process. If oxygen/fuel cutting is being done, the high preheat turns on for the specified time and then the cutting oxygen. To extend or shorten the high preheat time, press and hold the <CYCLE START> key for the desired preheat time. To shorten the time, press and release the <CYCLE START> key when the cut is to start. If TEST RUN is selected, the program begins running with all cutting functions suspended. The program steps that would be cut are run at the speed set on the machines <SPEED> key, while traverse moves are done at the high traverse speed. If SINGLE STEP is selected, the program executes one program step each time <CYCLE START> is pressed. In either TEST RUN or SINGLE STEP modes, the part may be repositioned on the plate as follows: Allow the machine to run through the program to a point where it is apparent that the part needs to be moved to keep it on the available plate. Then press <CYCLE STOP> to stop the machine at that point. Now use the jog function to move the torch to the
PART-2:RUN-8
AO-73367
OPERATIONS: RUN
desired position on the plate. Once it is in the correct position, press <CYCLE START> to continue the test run. This process of stopping the test, jogging the torch and then continuing may be repeated as many times as needed to position the part correctly. Once the part is positioned, press <CYCLE STOP> and then the <PART RETURN> key three times to return to the home position of the part. Press <CYCLE STOP> again to return to the main cutting prompts and select the desired cutting mode. The <PART RETURN> key actually allows returning to one of three different positions on the part being cut. One press of <PART RETURN> returns to the most recent pierce point on the part. The message RETURN- PIERCE is displayed. The second press of <PART RETURN> returns to the start point of the current part. The message RETURN- START is displayed. The third press of <PART RETURN> returns to the home position on the selected cutting table. The message RETURN- HOME is displayed. NOTE: Press <SHF><PART RETURN> to return to Table #1 home reference position (0,0). The <BACK UP> key can be used in CUT, TEST RUN, or SINGLE STEP to retrace the cut path, to either verify positioning or in the case of a lost cut. When pressed as the part is running forward, the machine backs up at a preset speed as long as the key is held. When the desired point is reached, release the key and restart the cut. NOTE: The <BACK UP> key does not work if <CYCLE STOP> is pressed.
To stop the program at any point, press <CYCLE STOP>. To continue, press <CYCLE START> again. After stopping, it is possible to jog away from the part (to clean a torch tip for instance). If you then press <BACK UP>, the machine returns directly to the position where it was jogged from. Press <CYCLE START> to continue cutting the part. To stop executing the program and return to the top prompting level, press <RECYCLE>.
AO-73367
PART-2:RUN-9
BLANK
UTILITIES: EDIT
PROGRAM TEXT EDITOR
PROGRAM EDITING
The EDIT/NEW function allows the 1250 to create and edit programs in NC Program Memory. To enter this mode, press the <ENTER> key when EDIT/NEW is displayed. The message EDIT- XXXXXXXX is then displayed, the last used program. Select the desired program number from those in memory by using the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll through the list, or enter a new program number that does not exist to create a new program and press <ENTER>. Once a program is selected, the first data block is displayed and editing can begin.
MAIN DATA BLOCK DISPLAY

The editor has the ability to do two basic operations. It can display a list of data blocks in memory, and it can edit a specific block of information. In DISPLAY MODE, the screen displays the internal block number on the left side. This number indicates the position of the block in the program. For example, the fifth block in any part program is displayed as B0005. To display a particular block, use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll up and down through the program. Each time you press a scroll arrow key, the new block number and the type of information contained in the block is shown. The numeric keypad can also be used to quickly access a particular block. Enter the desired block number on the keypad. When the first digit is pressed, the screen displays: GO TO- B#### After the correct value is displayed, press <ENTER>. The specified block is then displayed. If you enter a block number past the end of the program, or if you use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to step past the end or beginning of the program, a brief message appears indicating the condition and then the previous block is displayed. If you reach the program end, the screen displays PROGRAM END and then backs up to the last block in the program. If you scroll past the beginning of the program, the screen displays PROGRAM TOP and then displays the first program block. While you are in MAIN DATA BLOCK DISPLAY mode, the left side of the display shows the block number while the right side shows a variety of information depending on the type of block: LINE, ARC, or FUNCTION. For the following examples, assume that the data block displayed is the fifth internal block in the program.
AO-73367
PART-3:EDIT-1
For LINE moves, the display shows B0005 - LINE +X +Y. This means that the block causes a linear movement. The remainder of the block shows the signed dimensions present in the data block. The actual dimensions are not shown at this point so that you can quickly scan through the data blocks without having to look for specific dimensions. To look at the actual X/Y dimensions, the block must be selected for editing as described later. For ARC moves, the display alternates between B0005 - CW/CCW ARC and B0005- +X +Y +I +J. The first display shows the direction of the arc, either clockwise or counterclockwise. The second display shows the signed dimensions present in the data block. Again, to avoid extra displays, the individual dimensions are not shown at this point. As with LINE moves, the block must be selected for editing to see the actual X/Y/I/J dimensions. For FUNCTION data blocks, there are several possible displays. B0005- **NAME** -F## In this display, the **NAME** and F## are one of the functions listed at the end of this section. For example, if block 5 performed the CUT ON function, the display would show B0005- CUT ON -F06 B0005- INTERNAL C0 Internal functions have been created by the 1250. Although they are displayed, they cannot be edited or deleted since they are essential to the programs execution. Normally they should be ignored.
EDITING COMMANDS
After the desired block is displayed, the data may be displayed and changed if necessary. To edit the block being displayed, press the <.> (decimal point) key and then press <ENTER>. This two-key combination is used to prevent accidental editing of a data block. If the block is a line or arc, continue at section: LINE/ARC BLOCK EDITING. If the block is a function, continue at section: FUNCTION BLOCK EDITING. To abort the edit process without altering the block data, press the <RECYCLE> key. This returns the control to the MAIN BLOCK DISPLAY without altering the data.
LINE/ARC BLOCK EDITING

If the selected data block is a line or arc, the following sequence of prompts appears. X DIM= ######## Y DIM= ######## Displays the current X dimension. Enter a new value if desired. Displays the current Y dimension. Enter a new value if desired.
PART-3:EDIT-2
AO-73367
UTILITIES: EDIT
I DIM= ########
Displays the current I dimension, which is the distance from the start point to the center of an arc along the X axis. This value must be 0.00 for line blocks, since including an I or J dimension in a data block causes an arc. Although the input block may have been a line, the prompts for the I and J dimensions appear. Enter a new value if desired. Displays the current J dimension, which is the distance from the start point to the center of an arc along the Y axis. See the comments for I dimension above. This prompt only appears if either the I or J dimension is not 0.00, which indicates an arc data block. If both are 0, the block is a line and thus has no arc direction. To toggle between CW and CCW, press the <+/-> to display the desired direction. Then press <ENTER>. After all the previous prompts have occurred, the verify prompt is displayed. Use the <+/-> key to toggle between the YES/NO response and then press <ENTER>. A YES response causes the X/Y/I/J prompting to restart so the dimensions can be verified and changed again if necessary. A NO response ends the editing of the data block and stores the results in NC Program Memory.
J DIM= ########
ARC DIRECTION CW/CCW
VERIFY- YES/NO
NOTE: If only the <ENTER> key is pressed for each prompt, and none of the data values are changed, the original block is not replaced in NC Program Memory. However, if any of the dimensions or arc direction values are changed, a new data block is created and the entire original block is replaced. After all the prompts are entered, and the VERIFY- NO response entered, the readout returns to the MAIN DATA BLOCK display.
FUNCTION BLOCK EDITING

If the block being edited is a function (such as CUTON, KRFLFT, etc.), the following prompt FNC- ## - NAME is displayed. The ## digits contain the function number from the list at the end of this section. The function name is displayed on the right side. Some examples are: FNC- 03 - CHNTOP FNC- 05 - CUTOFF Function 03 - CHAIN TOP Function 05 - CUTTING OFF
To change the function, use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll up or down through the list of functions given in the list (at the end of this section). Each time you press UP or DOWN, the next function number and name from the list is displayed.
AO-73367
PART-3:EDIT-3
Consequently, there is no need to memorize the function codes since you can scroll through the list for the desired value. Instead of scrolling to the desired function, the function number can be entered directly on the keypad. As soon as the number entry starts, the display changes to FUNCTION## with the numbers being entered in the ## digits. Once the desired value Is displayed, press <ENTER>. The display returns to FNC- ## NAME display described above. After the desired function is displayed, either by scrolling through the list or by entering the desired function number directly, press <ENTER>. In most cases, this finishes the editing process for the function and replaces the original data block with the new function code. Once this is done, the display returns to the MAIN DATA BLOCK display and the new function code is shown.
DELETING A BLOCK
If it is necessary to delete a block from the program, the desired block should first be displayed as described in MAIN DATA BLOCK DISPLAY. When it is displayed, press the <CE> key. The display changes to 0000 TO DELETE. Press <ENTER>. The display prompts you again to ensure that the block is not deleted by accident. For example, if you wish to delete data block five, the display will show DELETE B0005- NO. If you press <ENTER> at this point, the 1250 aborts the delete and does not alter the program in any way. To continue the delete process, press the <+/-> key to toggle the selection to YES, and then press <ENTER>. The indicated block is erased from NC Program Memory. All following blocks move up one number so block 6 becomes block 5, and so on. The display now returns to the MAIN BLOCK DISPLAY.
INSERTING A DATA BLOCK

The INSERT function allows you to add data blocks to the program, either above or below any other data block in the program. No blocks may be added, however, above the PROGRAM START or after the PROGRAM END.

To insert a block above the current block shown on the MAIN BLOCK DISPLAY, first press <SHF> and then the UP scroll arrow. To insert a block below the current block shown on the MAIN BLOCK DISPLAY, first press <SHF> and then the DOWN scroll arrow.
After the two-key combination is pressed, the control prompts for the type of block to be inserted, either a LINE/ARC BLOCK or a FUNCTION. (Since the only difference between line and arc blocks is the I and J dimensions, they are considered the same for the insert function.) The control will display either: INSERT- LINE/ARC or INSERT- FUNCTION
PART-3:EDIT-4
AO-73367
UTILITIES: EDIT
Use the <+/-> key to toggle between the two selections and press <ENTER> when the desired one is displayed. This inserts a blank block into the part program and then goes immediately to the editing function for that block. If a LINE/ARC is inserted, the prompting goes to the X/Y/I/J/CW-CCW prompts with all the dimensions set to 0. If a function block is inserted, the prompting switches to the function editing prompts listed in FUNCTION BLOCK EDITING, with the function code set to PGMNOP-00. Go to the appropriate section for information on entering the new values.
TERMINATING THE EDITOR

Once the necessary corrections have been made to the program, and the MAIN BLOCK DISPLAY is showing, press the <RECYCLE> key to terminate the editor and return to the main SELECT FUNCTION prompt. If there were no data changes in the program (no deletions, insertions, or any editing of data values), the program can be run immediately with no additional processing. If any data have been changed, however, or if any blocks were inserted or deleted, the DIAL-INKERF and ACCEL/DECEL processing must be re-done on the program. Consequently, if a program is edited and then run, the delays associated with the kerf and deceleration programs will occur the first time. After that, the program can be re-run with no delay.
AO-73367
PART-3:EDIT-5
INTERNAL FUNCTION NAMES / CODES
PGMNOP UNUSED UNUSED CHNTOP
00 01 02 03
PROGRAM NOP. No operation. Not normally used during program edit. UNUSED INDEX. Ignore. UNUSED INDEX. Ignore. CHAIN TOP. This code sets a repeat pointer that is used when the CHAIN BOTTOM 04 code is executed. If the 03 code is not included in a program, the program returns to the beginning of the program. If this code is included in a program, the repeat returns to that point rather than the top of the program. A prompt VALUE #1 = 0000 allows for optional loop programming. Normally set to 0000. CHAIN BOTTOM. This code is placed at the end of a program to cause an automatic program repeat when the code is read. If this code is omitted, the program runs until it reaches the PROGRAM END code and then stops. You will have to press the <CYCLE START> key to cut another part. CUTTING OFF. Turns off the cutting process. CUTTING ON. Turns on the cutting process. KERF OFF. The KERF OFF function is automatically done each time the cutting is turned off. Consequently, there is normally no need for a separate KERF OFF code in the program. It is normally only used with the AUXILIARY CODE CONVERSION feature. KERF LEFT. Sets the kerf direction to the left of the path for the DIAL-IN-KERF function. KERF RIGHT. Sets the kerf direction to the right of the path for the DIAL-IN-KERF function. MARKER #1 OFF. Turns off the #1 marking device. MARKER #1 ON. Turns on the #1 marking device. OFFSET #1 OFF. Cancels the #1 marker offset and moves the machine back to the cutting position. The prompt VAL 1=0000 is used to select 1 of 8 offsets. See SD80 - SD96 in INSTALLATION AND SETUP.
CHNBOT
04
CUTOFF CUTON KRFOFF
05 06 07
KRFLFT KRFRHT MARKOFF MRKON OFSOFF
08 09 10 11 12
PART-3:EDIT-6
AO-73367
UTILITIES: EDIT
OFSON
13
OFFSET #1 ON. Turns on the #1 marker offset and moves the machine to the offset position. The prompt VAL 1=0000 is used to select 1 of 8 offsets. See SD80 - SD96 in INSTALLATION AND SETUP. INCH DIMENSIONS. This affects the program during the LOAD process only, and indicates that all following dimensions are programmed in INCH units. While this code affects the program dimensions as they are being loaded into memory, once the program is loaded, it serves no purpose. Therefore, editing or deleting this code does not affect the operation of the machine. However, if the program is stored via the RS-232 port, the edited code affects the resulting Word Address or ESSI program. If the program is re-loaded, the changed codes affect the data being loaded into memory. MILLIMETER DIMENSIONS. This affects the program during the LOAD process only, and indicates that all following dimensions are programmed in MILLIMETER. See comments for INCH code 14 above. ABSOLUTE DIMENSIONS. This affects the program during the LOAD process only, and indicates that all following dimensions are in ABSOLUTE format. When a program is being loaded, all dimensions are saved as ABSOLUTE movements, even if the input program uses INCREMENTAL dimensions. Therefore, once the program is loaded, this code serves no purpose. Editing or deleting this code does not affect the operation of the machine. However, if the program is stored via the RS-232 port, this code is used to re-construct the program so that it appears the same as when it was loaded. Consequently, changing affects the program data as it is being re-loaded into memory. ABSOLUTE REGISTER PRELOAD. This affects the program during the LOAD process only. It occurs only in ABSOLUTE dimension programs and is used to reset the absolute zero point to a new location. Since dimensions are not stored in ABSOLUTE format, this code has no affect on the machine after the program is loaded. It is only saved so that the program can be re-constructed when you store to the RS-232 port.
INCH
14
MMETER
15
ABSDIM
16
ABSRPL
17
AO-73367
PART-3:EDIT-7
INCDIM
18
INCREMENTAL DIMENSIONS. This affects programs during the LOAD process only, and indicates that all following program dimensions are in INCREMENTAL format. See comments for ABSDIM code 16 above. PROGRAM DWELL. As a part is being run, this code causes the machine to execute a programmed dwell function. The motion stops, and all relays are maintained in their current state. After the specified dwell time, the program continues execution. The dwell function can also contain a data word that sets the dwell time to be used for this and all following dwell commands until a new time is set. If the time is included in the function block, it is displayed as VAL 1= XXX.XX with the time being shown in seconds. When the block is edited, the same value prompt appears that allows the dwell time to be edited as desired. PROGRAMMED LEAD-IN. This code operates with the DIAL-IN-KERF function, and indicates that the following line or arc block is a LEAD-IN to a part and should not be kerf compensated. This causes the pierce point to remain fixed rather than being offset by the kerf dimension. PROGRAM STOP. Causes the machine to stop and all cutting functions to be turned off. You must press < CYCLE START> to resume operation. PROGRAM END. This code and the 23 code both indicate the end of the part program. The only difference between these two occurs if the program is stored via the RS-232 port. The 22 PGMEND code is output as a PROGRAM END-NO REWIND function, while the 23 PGMRWND code is output as a PROGRAM END-REWIND. If multiple programs are downloaded, all but the last one must end with the 22 PROGRAM END-NO REWIND code. This allows multiple download operations. The last program in the group normally contains the 23 PROGRAM ENDREWIND code, which causes the rewind process to operate. IMPORTANT: Do not delete the program end code. PROGRAM END WITH REWIND. See description for PGMEND, code 22.
DWELL
19
LEADIN
20
PGMSTP
21
PRGMEND
22
PGMRWD
23
PART-3:EDIT-8
AO-73367
UTILITIES: EDIT
SPKON
24
DO NOT USE FOR EDITING. This code is used to set up the optional AUXILIARY CODE CONVERSION tables only and has no other function. Since the same function list is used for both editing and the auxiliary code conversion, it appears in this list. DO NOT USE FOR EDITING. See comments for SPKON, code 24. MARKER #2 ON. Turns on the #2 Plate Marking Device. MARKER #2 OFF. Turns off the #2 Plate Marking Device. MARKER #2 OFFSET ON. Causes the machine to move to the offset dimensions set up for the #2 plate marking device. This shifts the marking device to the current programmed position before any marking move is done. MARKER #2 OFFSET OFF. Cancels the #2 marker offset and moves the cutting torches back to the programmed position. NOT USED FOR NORMAL EDITING. PARAMETER TABLE OVERLAY. VAL 1=# indicates which parameter overlay is being used. Possible values are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. CAUTION: When a value of 1, 2, 3, or 4 is entered, the corresponding overlay table accessed by SERV41, SERV42, SERV43, and SERV44 must be set up before the program is run. GO HOME. Indicates which cutting table home the machine should move to. VAL 1=# prompts for cutting table home 1, 2, 3, or 4. Special for multiple cutting tool operations. VAL 1=# selects the tool code. PROGRAMMABLE KERF. A kerf value may be inserted with this function. VAL 1 equals programmed kerf dimensions in the same units as system parameter SD60 (inches or millimeters). PROGRAMMABLE FEEDRATE. A feedrate value may be inserted with this function. VAL 1 equals programmed kerf dimensions in the same units as SD60 (inches per minute or millimeters per minute). PLASMA HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE. PLASMA HEIGHT SENSOR ENABLE.
SPKOFF MRK2ON MRK2OF OFS2ON
25 26 27 28
OFS2OFF
29
FUNCTIONS TB SEL VAL 1=#
30-38 39
GOHOME VAL 1=# TOOL VAL 1=# KRFDIM VAL 1=#
40
41 42
FEEDRT VAL 1=#
43
HTDIS HTENA
44 45
AO-73367
PART-3:EDIT-9
LDAUTO VAL 1=# PMARK1
46
AUTO PROGRAM LOAD FOR LOAD/RUN operation. VAL 1=# prompts for an 8-digit number of the next program to be loaded. SINGLE PUNCH auxiliary function on Marker #1. Causes a single punch mark based on marker delay parameter. No function in the 1250. PART COUNTER INCREMENT. Signals that a complete part has been cut. This is used in programs where more than one part is programmed as part of a single program. It allows each part to be counted individually.
47
48 COUNT 50
PART-3:EDIT-10
AO-73367
UTILITIES: EDIT
CREATING A SAMPLE PROGRAM

The following example shows the steps necessary to create a new program using the editor. For simplicity. many of the available entry options as described in the manual are not used.

Select EDIT/NEW PROGRAM from the main menu and press <ENTER>. Assign a new part number and press <ENTER>. The control provides the first and last blocks of the program. B0001INTERNAL C0-PROGRAM START is displayed. To add a new block, press <SHF> and then the DOWN scroll arrow key. The control displays INSERT LIN/ARC. Change this to INSERT FUNCTION by pressing <+/->. To add a function, press <ENTER>. To control displays FNC-00-PGMNOP. Press the DOWN scroll arrow key until FNC-06-CUTON is displayed. Press <ENTER>. B-002-CUTON-F06 is now displayed. To add a new block, press <SHF> and then the DOWN scroll arrow key. The control displays INSERT-LIN/ARC. Change this to INSERT FUNCTION by pressing <+/->. To add a function, press <ENTER>. The control displays FNC-00-PGMNOP. Press the DOWN scroll arrow key until FNC-08-KRFLFT is displayed and then press <ENTER>. B-003-KRFLFT-F08 is displayed. To add a new block, press <SHF> and then the DOWN scroll arrow key. The control displays INSERT-LIN/ARC. Press <ENTER>. X-DIM=0000 is displayed. Use the numeric keypad to enter the dimension 100. Press <ENTER>. Y-DIM=0000 is displayed. Press <ENTER>. I-DIM=0000 is displayed. Press <ENTER>. J-DIM=0000 is displayed. Press <ENTER>. VERIFY-YES is displayed. Press <+/->. VERIFY-NO is displayed. Press <ENTER>. B-0004-LINE +X is displayed. To add a new block, press <SHF> and then the DOWN scroll arrow key. The control displays INSERT-LIN/ARC. Press <ENTER>. X-DIM=0000 is displayed. Press <ENTER>. Use the numeric keypad to enter the dimension 80 and press <ENTER>. Y-DIM=0000 is displayed. Press <ENTER>.
AO-73367
PART-3:EDIT-11
I-DIM=0000 is displayed. Use the numeric keypad to enter the dimension 40 and press <ENTER>. J-DIM=0000 is displayed. Press <ENTER>. ARC-DIRCT-CW is displayed. Press <ENTER>. VERIFY-YES is displayed. Press <+/->. VERIFY-NO is displayed. Press <ENTER>. B-0005-ARC-CW is displayed, and then B-0005- -X -I is displayed. To add a new block, press <SHF> and the DOWN scroll arrow key. The control displays INSERT-LIN/ARC. Press <ENTER>. X-DIM=0000 is displayed. Press <ENTER>. Y-DIM=0000 is displayed. Use the numeric keypad to enter the dimension 20 and press <ENTER>. I-DIM=0000 is displayed. Press <ENTER>. J-DIM=0000 is displayed. Press <ENTER>. VERIFY-YES is displayed. Press <+/->. VERIFY-NO is displayed. Press <ENTER>. B-0006-LINE +Y is displayed. To add a new block, press <SHF> and then the DOWN scroll arrow key. INSERT-LIN/ARC is displayed. Change this to INSERT- FUNCTION by pressing <+/->. Press <ENTER>. FNC-00-PGMNOP is displayed. Press the DOWN scroll arrow key until FNC05-CUTOFF is displayed. Press <ENTER>. B-0007-CUTOFF-F05 is displayed. The program is finished. Press <RECYCLE>.
PART-3:EDIT-12
AO-73367
UTILITIES: EDIT
B-0004 LINE +X
B-0005 ARC CW -X -I
B-0006 LINE +Y B-0007 CUTOFF -F05 B-0008 PGMRWD -F23
B-0001-PGM-START-INTERNAL C0 B-0002-CUT 0N -F06 B-0003-KRFLT-F08
EDIT/NEW SAMPLE PROGRAM
AO-73367
PART-3:EDIT-13
BLANK
UTILITIES: DISPLAY MODES
DISPLAY MODES
DISPLAY MODE
The DISPLAY MODE is provided as a means of accessing information without interrupting the machine operation. You may press <DSPY> at any time, during any operation. It can be used while a part is being cut to check machine position, cutting speed and other operating parameters, or it can be used to access the diagnostic displays to aid in troubleshooting a problem. When you press <DSPY>, you are prompted to select the desired display from the following list: DSPY00-EXIT MODE DSPY01-X/Y DISPLAY DSPY02-PARTS CUT DSPY03-FEEDRATE DSPY05-SYS. STAT DSPY10-SYS DATA DSPY11-DSPY VAR DSPY20-EDIT PRGM DSPY30-SHOW WORD DSPY31-SHOW DBL DSPY32-SHOW CRW DSPY33-SHOW BYTE DSPY34-SHOW CRUB DSPY80-CONFIG
Either use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to sequence through the list, or enter the two-digit number directly through the keypad. Press <ENTER> when the desired display mode is shown.
DPSY00-EXIT MODE
Use DISPLAY 00 to cancel the DISPLAY MENU and return to the previous operation.
DSPY01-X/Y DISPLAY
This display shows the current position for both the X and Y axis. When a part is being run, this display shows the distance from the original start point of the part. When no part is being run, the display may be used for direct X/Y measuring. Use the <CE> key to clear both readouts to 0 (zero). To measure a distance, position the machine at the first location, then clear the X/Y positions by pressing the <CE> key. As the machine is moved, the readout displays the machines position, referenced from the point where it was cleared.
DSPY02-PARTS CUT
When a part program is being run, this display shows the number of part cycles that have been performed. If only one torch is being used, this is the actual number of parts produced. If multiple torches are used, however, the number of parts that have been cut is the displayed value multiplied by the number of torches.
AO-73367 PART-3:DSPY-1
DSPY03-FEEDRATE
This display shows the current setting of the machine's <SPEED> key in either inches per minute (IPM) or millimeters per minute (MMPM), depending on the SD60 setting. If DIGITAL FEEDRATE or PROGRAMMABLE FEEDRATE is used, then DISPLAY 03 allows a new feedrate to be entered via the keypad.
DSPY05-SYS. STATUS
DSPY05- SYSTEM STATUS displays E-STOP error messages. It also displays which part program is being cut if selected while a part program is running.
SERVICE DISPLAYS DSPY10 DSPY44

These are service and diagnostic displays, which do not allow data entry. See detailed descriptions in the INSTALLATION AND SETUP section of this manual.
DSPY80-CONFIG
DISPLAY 80-CONFIGURE displays the system serial number, software version, and the amount of memory installed in the unit. Press <ENTER> to view a list of all the available features for the system. When first selected, the display continuously scrolls through the following: SERIAL xxxxxxxxx VERSION mm/yy/dd HDW TYPE -10 ____K INSTALLED Serial Number Software Version Hardware version number Amount of memory
When you first press <ENTER>, display shows OPTIONS ON/OFF and then switches to a list of all the available features for the system. Either ON or OFF next to the name indicates whether or not the feature is enabled. Press <ENTER> or the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll through the list. NOTE: Before you call about a service or operational problem, select DSPY-80 and write down the serial number and software version displayed on the readout. This will aid the service personnel. Please note that the serial number must be the one displayed on the readout, not one found on a sticker somewhere on the enclosure.
PART-3:DSPY-2
AO-73367
UTILITIES: SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
To select the SPECIAL FUNCTION mode of the 1250, you must first be in the RECYCLE state (that is, you must first press <RECYCLE>). Then press the <I> key. Use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys or enter the desired number directly to select from the following menu: FNC00- EXIT MODE FNC01- MANUAL CUT Exits back to main menu. Manual control of cutting outputs or stripping, cutting up remnants, and testing cut control outputs. Return to one of four fixed home reference positions. Reset machine reference (0,0) position after power-failure.
FNC15- GO HOME FNC16- SET HOME
MANUAL CONTROL MODE

The MANUAL CONTROL MODE gives you direct control of the cutting control relay outputs. This permits several types of operation:

Cutting processes (plasma or oxygen/fuel) can be turned ON or OFF and used in conjunction with the JOG controls to cut up scrap material, or for stripping plate. Cutting processes can be turned on before a part program is cut to check gas pressure and cut quality. Individual control relays can be turned ON/OFF to aid in installation and troubleshooting.
PLASMA/OXYGEN FUEL CUTTING SELECTION

As described in the section RUNNING THE PROGRAM, there are only three relays in the 1250 for controlling the cutting process. If both oxygen/fuel and plasma are used on a machine, the external circuitry directs these three relays to the appropriate process. With the setup parameters set to allow both processes, a prompt appears for you to select which process is to be used for MANUAL CONTROL. Press <+/-> to toggle between the PLASMA and OXY/FUEL selections. Press <ENTER> when the correct choice is shown. NOTE: Once the plasma or oxygen/fuel choice is made, only the MANUAL CONTROL functions for that selection are available. To switch to the other process, you must press <RECYCLE> to cancel the current operation, and re-select the MANUAL CONTROL function again; this time choose the other cutting process.
AO-73367
PART-3:SPCFNC-1
If only one cutting process is used on the machine, the setup parameters should have been set so that the selection of PLASMA or OXY/FUEL is made automatically. In this case, the prompt for OXY/FUEL or PLASMA is not displayed. Once you choose either oxygen/fuel or plasma, the readout displays MANUAL CONTROL and then ** SELECT **. Then the menu of available MANUAL CONTROL functions for the selected cutting process is displayed. Use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll through the list. Press <ENTER> when the correct function is displayed.
OXYGEN/FUEL MANUAL CONTROL FUNCTIONS

For oxygen/fuel cutting, the following manual control functions are available:
OXY PRHT/CUT High preheat, then start cutting oxygen OXY ENABLE OXY START PREHEAT
Turn on CUTTING OXYGEN ENABLE relay only Turn on CUTTING OXYGEN START relay only Turn on HIGH PREHEAT relay only
OXY PRHT/CUT This function is used for cutting scrap material or for stripping plates in a single axis. It controls both the PREHEAT and CUTTING OXYGEN functions. When selected, the control prompts you to press <CYCLE START> to turn on the high preheat gasses. Once the high preheat has been turned on, you are then prompted to press <CYCLE START> again, to turn on the cutting oxygen. (High Preheat is turned off automatically.) Once the oxygen is turned on, the JOG keys on the panel can be used to move the machine to cut in the desired direction. The display now prompts you to press <CYCLE STOP> to turn off the cutting oxygen and re-start the sequence. Once you press <CYCLE STOP>, you must press <CYCLE START> again to preheat and a second time for the cutting oxygen. After all cutting is complete, or to change to a different MANUAL CONTROL mode, press either the UP or DOWN scroll arrow key. This returns to the menu of available MANUAL CONTROL functions and allows a different one to be selected. OXY ENABLE This function activates the CUTTING OXYGEN ENABLE relay, but does not start the actual cutting oxygen. Once the enable relay is turned on, the cutting oxygen switch on the machine panel can be used to start the oxygen, if desired. Normally, this function is used for testing the enable relay output only. Once selected, the prompts indicate that you must press <CYCLE START> or <CYCLE STOP> to turn the OXYGEN ENABLE relay ON and OFF. Press either the UP or DOWN scroll arrow keys to return to the menu of available MANUAL CONTROL functions.
PART-3:SPCFNC-2
AO-73367
OXY START This function is used for testing the CUTTING OXYGEN START relay, and does not actually start the flow of cutting oxygen gas. (The enable relay described earlier is not turned on by this test.) Once selected, the prompts indicate that you must use <CYCLE START> and <CYCLE STOP> to control the relay. Use the UP or DOWN scroll arrow keys to return to the menu of available MANUAL CONTROL functions. PREHEAT This function is used for testing the HIGH PREHEAT RELAY output only. Since this relay controls the high preheat gas directly, when it is turned on, the high preheat gas is turned on. Therefore, this mode could be used to check the high preheat gas pressures before cutting a part program. More commonly, this mode is used to check the relay output for testing purposes. When selected, the prompts indicate that you must press <CYCLE START> and <CYCLE STOP> to control the relay. Press either the UP or DOWN scroll arrow keys to return to the menu of available MANUAL CONTROL functions.
PLASMA MANUAL CONTROL FUNCTIONS

For PLASMA cutting, the following manual control functions are available:

PLASMA CUT PLASMA JOG/CUT PLASMA ENABLE PLASMA START HEIGHT DISABLE
Enable plasma, then start plasma cut

JOG keys
interlock with plasma cut
Turn on PLASMA ENABLE relay only Turn on PLASMA START relay only Set for PLASMA HEIGHT sensor disable
PLASMA CUT This selection may be used to test fire the plasma torch, by cutting up scrap material or strip-cutting a plate. Once selected, the control prompts you to press <CYCLE START> to enable the plasma torch. This does not cause the torch to fire; it activates the PLASMA ENABLE relay, which puts the plasma control circuitry in a state where it can be started by a separate start input. On some machines, the PLASMA ENABLE causes the torch to be lowered to the plate. Once enabled, the display changes to prompt you to press <CYCLE START> to actually fire the plasma torch. Once the torch fires, use the JOG keys move the machine to cut the desired pattern. Note that the machine does not move automatically once the torch fires; you must use the JOG controls. Since it is sometimes difficult to coordinate the JOG function with the torch firing, a second cutting mode provides a better interlock between the torch and the JOG controls. See PLASMA CUT/JOG .
AO-73367
PART-3:SPCFNC-3
To turn the plasma torch off, press <CYCLE STOP>. To return to the MANUAL CONTROL menu, press either the UP or DOWN scroll arrow key. PLASMA CUT/JOG This mode also provides a way to turn on the plasma torch for cutting up scrap material or stripping the plate. The first selection (PLASMA CUT) has the plasma controls and JOG controls operating independently. While this may work for some thicker plate applications, thin plate requires that the machine begin moving as soon as the arc fires, otherwise the torch goes out. The PLASMA CUT/JOG function interlocks the JOG controls with the plasma firing as follows: Once the selection is made, the control prompts you to press <CYCLE START> to enable the plasma torch. This does not fire the torch; it only sets the electronics in a condition where they can be started from a separate start input. On some machines, the PLASMA ENABLE causes the torch to be lowered to the plate. Once enabled, the display changes to HOLD JOG KEY TO FIRE PLASMA. You must press and hold one of the JOG DIRECTION keys for the desired jog direction. As soon as the JOG DIRECTION key is pressed, the plasma system is started. Since the plasma system goes through a purge cycle, you must continue to hold the JOG DIRECTION key until the arc fires. The machine does not move during this time. Once the arc fires, the machine immediately begins moving in the selected jog direction, at the speed set by the feedrate. To stop the plasma cut, just release the JOG DIRECTION key. Once the machine has stopped, the plasma torch is automatically turned off, and the entire sequence must be repeated. While the torch is cutting, you can change the direction of cut by simply releasing the current JOG DIRECTION key, and pressing a new one. The new direction key must be pressed before the machine decelerates to a stop; otherwise the torch is turned off as described above. There is no need to press <CYCLE STOP>, since releasing the JOG direction key automatically stops the plasma. Press the UP or DOWN scroll arrow key to return to the MANUAL CONTROL menu to make a new selection. PLASMA ENABLE This function is used to test the PLASMA ENABLE relay output. Once selected, press either <CYCLE START> or <CYCLE STOP> to toggle the relay output. Press either the UP or DOWN scroll arrow keys to return to the MANUAL CONTROL menu. PLASMA START This function is used to test the PLASMA START relay output. Once selected, press either <CYCLE START> or <CYCLE STOP> to toggle the relay output. Press either the UP or DOWN scroll arrow keys to return to the MANUAL CONTROL menu. HEIGHT DISABLE This function is used to test the PLASMA HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE relay output. Once selected, press either <CYCLE START> or <CYCLE STOP> to toggle the relay output.
PART-3:SPCFNC-4
AO-73367
The relay is initially OFF, which allows the plasma height sensor to operate. Press <CYCLE START> to set the relay to ON, which inhibits the plasma height sensor raising or lowering the torch. This relay is used when a part program is actually being cut to prevent the torch from diving into the plate when the machine slows to go around a corner. The height sensor is disabled until the machine has re-accelerated back to cutting speed. Press either the UP or DOWN scroll arrow key to return to the MANUAL CONTROL menu.
MARKER TEST
If the PLATE MARKING option is enabled on the 1250, this prompt is displayed after the PREHEAT MANUAL control function. It is used to manually turn on the plate marking device for testing.
FNC15-GO HOME
The 1250 has the ability to return to one of four different home positions in the operating area of the machine. You must define the Table #1 (0,0) home position using the FNC-16 SET HOME function after a power failure, or after the 1250 has lost power for any reason. Once defined, it is remembered regardless of what other operation is performed on the machine. Parts can be cut at any location on the table, programs can be downloaded, and kerfed, etc., without affecting the location of the Table #1 home position. Only a power failure causes this location to be lost, and requires the FNC-16 SET HOME function to be re-set. In addition to the Table #1 home position, there are three additional TABLE HOME positions that are defined as offsets from the reference home position (Table #1). These TABLE HOME offsets are entered as setup parameters SD74 - SD79. (See the INSTALLATION AND SETUP section of this manual.) TABLE #2 HOME OFFSET, TABLE #3 HOME OFFSET, and TABLE #4 HOME OFFSET parameters define a home position on each of possible cutting tables. This feature is particularly useful for operations where the material is pre-cut to fixed sizes and is always located at the same place on the cutting tables. By defining these fixed table home positions, the torch can accurately be positioned on each table. Once a table GO HOME function is performed, the home position on that table is considered the (0,0) position for all subsequent operations. The machine (0,0) is not affected.
GO HOME MENU
When you select FNC-15 GO HOME, the display changes to GO TO HOME- 1. The following are the choices for the GO HOME function: GO TO TABLE HOME- 1 Causes the machine to return to the (0,0) position on the machine. This position is the point from which all other table home positions are measured.
AO-73367
PART-3:SPCFNC-5
GO TO TABLE HOME- 2
Causes the machine to move to Table #2 (0,0), which is defined as an offset from Table #1 (0,0) position by parameters SD74 and SD75. Causes the machine to move to Table #3 (0,0), which is defined as an offset from Table #1 (0,0) position by parameters SD76 and SD77. Causes the machine to move to Table #4 (0,0), which is defined as an offset from Table #1 (0,0) position by parameters SD78 and SD79.
GO TO TABLE HOME- 3
GO TO TABLE HOME- 4
Press either the UP or DOWN scroll arrow key to scroll through the list, or enter the digit directly. Once the correct number is displayed, press <ENTER>. The display changes to PUSH- CYCLE START. The machine does not move until you press <CYCLE START>. When you do, the machine begins moving to the selected home position, and the readout shows the X/Y distance to the final location. When it is reached, the readout shows 0,0. GO TO TABLE HOME FROM PART PROGRAMS There are several commands and functions in the 1250 that allow the table homes to be accessed automatically through the part program. The following codes in Word Address and ESSI allow the part program to command the machine to go to a particular home position: WADR1 Go to Table 1 home: Go to Table 2 home: Go to Table 3 home: Go to Table 4 home: M79T1 M79T2 M79T3 M79T4 WADR2 M79T1 M79T2 M79T3 M79T4 ESSI 79+1 79+2 79+3 79+4
These codes can be used at any point in a non-cutting portion of a part program to relocate the machine to a different table's home position. Also, one of the home locations can be designated as a PARK location, so you can unload the cut parts and load new material. You also have the ability to override the programmed home command so that if the machine is sent to Table 2, but the material is on Table 1, you can return the machine to Table 1. To override the programmed home command, press the <AUXILIARY> function key (blank area to the left of the <DSPY> key). Normally, there are several selections from this button. While a part is cutting, however, its only function is to override the home positions. When you press this area while a part is being cut, the readout displays GO TO HOME- X . Then press either the UP or DOWN scroll arrow key to scroll through a list, or enter the number directly of the desired table home. Then press <ENTER>. You are then prompted to PUSH-CYCLE START. When you press <CYCLE START>, the machine goes to the desired table home position. If the program had already been started on the wrong table, it will automatically restart after the home command so that the entire part is cut correctly at the new home position. A variation to this home capability occurs when you press <PART RET.>. Normally, if this key is pressed three times, the control returns to the starting home position for the
PART-3:SPCFNC-6 AO-73367
entire program. Since there are now multiple home positions, the third press of the key returns to the most recent Table home position. Additional presses of this key have no affect. This was done to make it easy to restart a part at a particular table home position. To recycle the entire part program and return to the original starting position, you must first return to the local TABLE HOME position as described above, and press <SHF><PART RET.>. Note that this two-key combination is only needed if the part program contains table home commands.
FNC-16 SET HOME

As described in FNC-15 above, the 1250 remembers Table #1 (0,0) home position as long as the power to the unit remains ON. When a power failure occurs, or the unit is turned off (or reset by SERV98- SYS RESET), the Table #1 home position must be redefined. The 1250 has two methods of defining the Table #1 home position. One method is used on machines that have home limit switches installed. The other method is used on machines that have no home limit switches.
SETTING TABLE #1 HOME POSITION - Machines with home limit switches

For proper operation, SD62-SYS CONFG2 must be set for home switches. See the INSTALLATION AND SETUP section of this manual. Select FNC-16 SET HOME to set the Table #1 home position. The readout displays PRESS CYCLE START FOR HOME SEARCH. When you press <CYCLE START>, the 1250 begins a search for the home position. It first moves in a direction set up in SD62-CONFG2 to find the Y home switch at about 100 IPM. When the switch is found, it reverses direction and backs off the switch at 5 IPM. As soon as the switch input is removed, the 1250 begins to search for the Y index pulse from the encoder. Once the index pulse is found, it stops and repeats the same process for the X axis.
SETTING TABLE #1 HOME POSITION - Machines without home limit switches

Use this method if the machine does not have home indexing switches installed. So that this alignment can be as accurate as possible, some type of scribe mark, end stop, alignment pin, or other device should be installed on the machine so you can accurately move the X and Y axes to a fixed location using the JOG DIRECTION controls. To set Table #1 home reference position, first jog the machine to the alignment position. Locate it as accurately as possible since this affects both the reference home position and Table home positions. Once the machine is located at the proper position, select the FNC-16 SET HOME special function. The readout displays YES+ SET HOME -NO. There are two verification prompts which must both be answered YES to set the home reference position. This is done to guard against accidentally changing the home location.
AO-73367
PART-3:SPCFNC-7
When this prompt is displayed, press the <+/-> key to cause the + or - indicator to flash. If you enter NO for either of the verification prompts, the home position is not changed, and the procedure aborts. To set the home reference position, press <+/-> to make the + sign by the YES, and then press <ENTER>. The readout displays NO- YOU SURE +YES. Again, this second prompt must also be answered +YES. Press <+/-> to get the + sign flashing and press <ENTER>. This causes the current location of the machine to be defined as the Table #1 home position. The readout displays the current encoder position as +0.00 +0.00. Press <RECYCLE> to return to the main menu.
PART-3:SPCFNC-8
AO-73367
UTILITIES: FLOPPY DRIVE
FLOPPY DRIVE OPERATION
NOTE: For proper operation of a externally mounted 1250 disk drive, software feature #5 must be enabled. The 1250 only loads programs with a preset file extension. The file extension is set by SD53-FILE EXTEN. See the INSTALLATION AND SETUP section of this manual.
FLOPPY DISK DRIVES

The 1250 floppy disk drive is able to load and store part programs to a 3-1/2 inch 720K or 1.4 meg floppy disk. The floppy drive is treated as a serial device. This gives you greater flexibility to use available features, such as the AUXILIARY CODE TABLE, DECIMAL SHIFT and AXIS SWAP. Programs that are loaded from and stored to the floppy disk are treated the same as they would be if loaded or stored through the serial port. The 1250 external floppy disk drive is available in two configurations: 1. 1250 portable floppy disk drive, which allows loading and storing of programs from the 1250. 2. 1250 portable floppy disk drive with keypad and LCD display. This version allows loading and storing programs from the 1250. It also has a keypad and LCD display, which allows for manual operation of the unit. The manual operation allows the flexibility to use the unit with other controls that support RS-232 serial communications. The 1250 floppy disk drive is 100% compatible with the MS-DOS and PC-DOS floppy disk format. Files may be copied to and from the 1250 by using the DOS copy command. NOTE: The 1250 floppy disk drives are only compatible with the United States versions of MS-DOS and PC-DOS operating systems.
FLOPPY UTILITIES DISK

The FLOPPY UTILITIES & TEST PROGRAMS disk that is shipped with each 1250 floppy disk drive contains a file that is used to configure the systems for the 1250. The name of this file is EASIDSK.SYS. Normally the drive only needs to be configured once and this is done at the factory. If the drive needs to be configured again, place the FLOPPY UTILITIES & TEST PROGRAMS disk in the drive with the power off. When power is turned on to the 1250, the disk drive reads the file EASIDSK.SYS and automatically configures the ports, baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, and a number of other parameters to the correct settings. Once the system is configured, the parameters are saved in non-volatile memory.
AO-73367
PART-3:FLOPPY-1
SERIAL CONNECTION
The 1250 floppy disk drive system port is configured at the factory as follows: COM1:4800 baud, even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, CTS/RTS disabled, and XON/XOFF enabled. A three-wire RS-232 serial cable is required for connection between the 1250 and the external floppy disk drive. The connection is as follows.
XON/XOFF SOFTWARE
TO 1250 SERIAL I/O PORT 2 RD 3 TD 9 STATUS IN 6 + 12V 7 COM.
25 PIN D-SUB AT PORTABLE DISK READER TD 2 RD 3 RTS CTS DSR DTR 4 5 6 20
COM. 7 CD 8
9 PIN AMP CPC
LOADING FILES FROM THE FLOPPY

To load a file from a 1250 portable floppy disk drive, press the <+/-> key, which selects LOAD FROM FLOPPY, and then press <ENTER>. The 1250 prompts you for a numeric program number (eight digits maximum). Enter the desired program number that resides on the floppy disk. Then press <ENTER>. The 1250 displays INSERT DISK -- PRESS ENTER- TO CONTINUE. Insert a formatted 3.5 inch floppy disk into the drive and close the door of the floppy drive. Press <ENTER> to continue. At this point, the 1250 does one of two things. If the second digit of SD50-SERIAL DEFINITION (the programming language select digit) is set to 0, prompting for the program type occurs. If the second digit of SD50-SERIAL DEFINITION is preset to some other value, the control begins the process of loading from the floppy disk. A red LED indicator light on the disk drive begins to flash, indicating there is disk activity. When the transfer is complete, the 1250 readout displays LOADING COMPLETE.
PART-3:FLOPPY-2
AO-73367
UTILITIES: FLOPPY DRIVE
If the selected program number exists on the disk, the 1250 displays LOADING - 0 and begins to load the program. If the selected program does not exist on the disk, the 1250 displays READ TIMEOUT, indicating that the file does not exist. NOTE: Valid program numbers consist of up to eight numeric digits with no leading zeros allowed. All programs must reside in the root directory of the floppy disk. The 1250 loads and stores programs with a file extension that is preset by the SD53-FILE EXTEN variable. See the INSTALLATION AND SETUP section of this manual for information on setting this variable.
SAVING FILES TO FLOPPY DISK

To store a file to a 1250 portable floppy disk drive, press the <.> (decimal point) key, which selects the STORE TO FLOPPY function, and then press <ENTER>. The 1250 prompts you for a numeric program number (eight digits maximum). Enter the desired program number to be stored on the floppy disk, then press <ENTER>. The 1250 readout displays INSERT DISK -- PRESS ENTER- -TO CONTINUE. Insert a formatted 3.5 inch floppy disk into the drive and close the door. Press <ENTER> to continue. At this point, the 1250 does one of two things. If the second digit of SD50- SERIAL DEFINITION (the programming language select digit) is set to 0, prompting for the program type occurs. If the second digit of SD50- SERIAL DEFINITION is preset to some other value, the program begins the process of storing to the floppy disk. A LED indicator light on the disk drive begins to flash, indicating there is disk activity. When the transfer is complete, the 1250 readout displays STORING COMPLETE.
AO-73367
PART-3:FLOPPY-3
BLANK
PART PROGRAMMING: INTRODUCTION
PROGRAMMING THE NC CONTROL
The 1250 accepts the two major programming languages used for X/Y shape cutting machines, Word Address (per EIA RS-274 specification) and ESSI. Additionally, several variations of each of these languages are available to be compatible with other existing equipment. The choices for program type are either selected during installation and setup, or can be selected when a particular operation is performed. These choices are: PGM TYPE-1-WADR PGM TYPE-2-ESSI PGM TYPE-3-INTL PGM TYPE-4-WADR1 PGM TYPE-5-WADR2 PGM TYPE-6-WADR3 PGM TYPE-7-ESSI1 Standard 1250 Word Address program Standard 1250 ESSI program Used for internal test purposes only Word Address Program Type #1 Word Address Program Type #2 Special Word Address. Uses CUSTOM AUXILIARY CODE CONVERSION TABLE and AXIS SWAP. Special ESSI. Uses CUSTOM AUXILIARY CODE CONVERSION TABLE and AXIS SWAP.
Normally, the first two formats, WADR and ESSI are used for programming the 1250. WADR1 and WADR2 formats are basically the same as the standard WADR format, but with some re-assignment of the auxiliary codes as indicated further on in this section. The two special formats, WADR3 and ESSI1 make use of several conversion features of the 1250 so that programs that have been prepared for a different control, or that use different auxiliary code definitions, can be directly loaded into the 1250 without requiring re-programming. These two formats allow for the following conversions: Change axis sign definitions: Allow axis interchange: Custom Aux Code Conversion: +X becomes -X Permits X and Y axis to be swapped Allows re-defining of all M, G, and ESSI auxiliary codes to match incoming program. It also allows for special end-of-program codes and forced auxiliary M code priority
Unless there is a specific reason for using these special formats, they should not be used since there are several parameters and data tables which must be set up for these to work correctly. If these conversions are needed, the specific setup steps are covered in the INSTALLATION AND SETUP section, under the topics SD51- PRGM FORMAT and SD70- CUSTOM AUX. The following two sections describe standard Word Address and ESSI programming. For simplicity, only incremental programming is described in these sections although the 1250 is capable of both incremental and absolute programming. The following sections
AO-73367
PART-4:PROG-1
are meant as a reference for the programming formats used by the 1250 and not a training course in part programming. Therefore, it is assumed that you are somewhat familiar with part programming techniques and procedures. When standard Word Address and ESSI formats are used, the following axis definitions apply:

The X axis is defined as the main rail axis with +X as the direction away from the operator and -X toward the operator. The Y axis is defined as the cross axis with +Y to the left and -Y to the right.
PART-4:PROG-2
AO-73367
PART PROGRAMMING: WORD ADDRESS
WORD ADDRESS PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE
WORD ADDRESS PROGRAMMING

Although there are four choices for Word Address programming, they are basically the same. The major difference is in the assignment of auxiliary function codes. These differences allow the 1250 to be compatible with other controls and programming systems. Some of the special formats could even be the same as the standard 1250 program type. In most cases, the standard format for the system should be used. Word Address 3 (special program format) allows complete re-definition of the auxiliary code functions and axis definitions. This section deals with the standard Word Address, Word Address 1, and Word Address 2 program formats.
WORD ADDRESS DATA BLOCK SPECIFICATION

A Word Address data block is made up of key characters and values. A key character is a letter that specifies a function, and the key characters that are supported in the 1250 are as per RS-274: Inch systems: Metric systems: %, P8, G3, X+54, Y+54, I+54, J+54, M3, T4, K+24, F54, Q8 %, P8, G3, X+63, Y+63, I+63, J+63, M3, T4, K+33, F63, Q8
All key characters, except for %, require a numerical value directly after them. These values further described the key character to the 1250. IMPORTANT NOTE: As per RS-274, all programs must start with a data block containing only a % (percent sign).
KEY CHARACTER DESCRIPTIONS

Any Word Address key character that is not described here is ignored. N - LINE NUMBER The N key character is a line number and is used for documentation purposes only. It does not affect program execution, and therefore, the 1250 does not store these values. When the 1250 loads a program through serial I/O, these values are discarded to conserve memory space. P - PROGRAM NUMBER This is an optional key character that allows an eight-digit program number to be included in a program. If a program is loaded containing a program number, it is automatically loaded in memory as that number.
AO-73367
PART-4:WADR-1
1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual X - DIMENSION FOR LINES OR ARCS In INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING, this is the distance from the start point to the end point of a move along the X (rail) axis. In ABSOLUTE PROGRAMMING, this is the distance from the zero point to the endpoint of the new move along the X (rail) axis. The following are the maximum values that can be used for the X value: +/-99,999.9999 inches +/-999,999.999 millimeters NOTE: X values that exceed these limits produce a PGM SYNTAX ERR (program syntax error) when loaded through the serial port. Y - DIMENSION FOR LINES OR ARCS In INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING, this is the distance from the start point to the end point of a move along the Y (cross) axis. In ABSOLUTE PROGRAMMING, this is the distance from the zero point to the endpoint of the new move along the Y (cross) axis. The following are the maximum values that can be used for the Y value: +/-99,999.9999 inches +/-999,999.999 millimeters NOTE: Y values that exceed these limits produce a PGM SYNTAX ERR (program syntax error) when loaded through the serial port. I - DIMENSION FOR ARCS The I key character is not used on lines. In INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING, this is the distance in the X (rail) axis from the start point to the center of an arc. In ABSOLUTE PROGRAMMING, this key character is dependent on SD51- PRGM FORMAT. If the third digit of PRGM FORMAT is 0, this dimension is the distance from the zero (home) position to center of arc along the X (rail) axis. If the third digit of PRGM FORMAT is 1, this dimension is the incremental distance from start point to center of the arc along the X axis. Consequently, the dimension is incremental even though absolute programming is being used. The following are the maximum values that can be used for the I value: +/-99,999.9999 inches +/-999,999.999 millimeters NOTE: I values that exceed these limits produce a PGM SYNTAX ERR (program syntax error) when loaded through the serial port.
PART-4:WADR-2
AO-73367
PART PROGRAMMING: WORD ADDRESS J - DIMENSION-FOR ARCS In INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING, this is the distance in the Y (cross) axis from the start point to the center of an arc. In ABSOLUTE PROGRAMMING, this value is dependent on SD51- PRGM FORMAT. If the third digit of PRGM FORMAT is 0, this dimension is the distance from the zero (home) position to center of arc along the Y (cross) axis. If the third digit of PRGM FORMAT is 1, this dimension is the incremental distance from start point to center of the arc along the Y axis. Consequently, the dimension is incremental even though absolute programming is being used. The following are the maximum values that can be used for the J value: +/-99,999.9999 inches +/-999,999.999 millimeters NOTE: J values that exceed these limits produce a PGM SYNTAX ERR (program syntax error) when loaded through the serial port.
SPECIAL NOTE ON PROGRAMMING ARCS The 1250 attempts to cut exactly what it is programmed to cut. When programming arc blocks, the distance from the starting point of the arc to the center should equal the distance from the end point to the center. If the values are not equal, the 1250 uses the end point to center distance when cutting the part. The difference is a path error. As this path error increases, an undesirable cut path and machine motion occurs. The machine motion being a factor of setup parameters and machine speed. If you press <BACK UP> to go in reverse through a cut path with improperly programmed arc blocks, machine motion is affected, since machine motion is a factor of setup parameters and back up speed. TIP: To prevent the possibility of a program containing a improperly programmed arc block from making unwanted cuts, use TEST RUN before cutting the part.
AO-73367
PART-4:WADR-3
G - PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS
Code G02 G03 G04 G40 G41 G42 G45 G46
Circular interpolation clockwise Circular interpolation counter-clockwise X Dwell B Kerf compensation cancel B Kerf compensation left B Kerf compensation right X Lead-in to kerf-compensated part E Selects which overlay parameter should be used. Example: G46 T1, where T can be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 G70 C Inch programming G71 C Metric programming G90 D Absolute programming G91 D Incremental programming G92 D Absolute register pre-load G97 X Sets program repeat pointer. G97 can be followed by a T value to generate a loop program. G98 X Initiates program repeat at G97 G103 X Auto erase and load NOTE 1: Function is retained until canceled or superseded by another command in the same letter group (A, B, C, or D). NOTE 2: Function affects only the block in which it appears.
Function Retained (Note 1) A A
Single Block (Note 2)
Function
PART-4:WADR-4
AO-73367
M - MACHINE AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS The supported M function definitions vary depending on the program format specified as illustrated in the following table. In most cases, the first column is the standard auxiliary code definitions for the 1250.
Std WADR Code M00 M02 M03 M20 M04 M21 M14 M15 M30 M70 M71
Special WADR1 Code M00 M02 M03 M20 M04 M21 M14 M15 M30 M70 M71
Special WADR2 Code M00 M02 M05 M21 M03 M20 M50 M51 M30 M70 M71
With Block
After Block X X X X
Description Program stop End of program Cut process off Cut process off Cut process on Cut process on Height sensor disable Height sensor enable End of program (rewind) Marker offset #1 off Marker offset #1 on Example: M71 T1 where T can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 Offset #2 off Offset #2 on Go to Table Home indicated by T value. Example: M79 T2, Go to Table #2 (0,0) home position.
X X X X X X X
M72 M73 M79
M72 M73 M79
M07 M06 M79
X X X
AO-73367
PART-4:WADR-5
1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual F - DWELL TIME The G04 command, along with the F key character and a numeric value immediately following it, sets the time that a dwell occurs. This dwell time is in effect for that block and all subsequent G04 blocks until a new F (dwell time) is included in another G04 block. Time is in seconds. For example: N12 G04 F22.5 Block #12, Dwell for 22.5 seconds
The maximum value for the F key character when describing a dwell time is 999.99 seconds. F - FEEDRATE When no G04 precedes the F value, the F key character, immediately followed by a numeric value, is used for programmable feedrate. The feedrate value must be in a block by itself. For example: N12 F100 NOTE: Block #12, Feedrate of 100 IPM (or MMPM)
The PROGRAMMABLE FEEDRATE option must be enabled for proper operation.
G CODE DESCRIPTIONS G02, G03 These two functions are used to define the direction for arc data blocks as either clockwise or counter-clockwise respectively. Once either of these functions is used, all subsequent arcs are in the same direction until the opposite code is used. This code causes a SYSTEM DWELL to be performed. During this time, the machine is held in position and all control outputs remain in their current condition. The default dwell time is established during the setup and installation procedure. This time is used for all G04 blocks until an F key character is included in the same block as the G04. In this case, the value contained by the F key character is used as the dwell time for this and all subsequent G04 blocks until changed by a new G04 block containing a different F time. G40, G41, G42 These three commands are used by the DIAL-IN-KERF routine to compensate the cutting path for the amount of material removed by the cutting process. The kerf directions (G41 for left, or G42 for right) are based on which way the centerline of the torch needs to be offset as it travels along the cutting path. G40 cancels the kerf. It is not needed in the program, however, since the kerf is automatically turned off when not cutting.
G04
PART-4:WADR-6
AO-73367
PART PROGRAMMING: WORD ADDRESS NOTE: When a part program contains either KERF LEFT or KERF RIGHT auxiliary function codes, the software assumes that the DIAL-IN-KERF feature is used to run the part. When the kerf is added to the part program, it requires approximately 25% more memory to store the kerf data along with the part dimensions. Therefore, when the incoming program is stored, this extra 25% of memory is automatically allocated for each data block. This causes the kerf processing to run about 20% faster, since the space is already available to store the results. If the DIAL-IN-KERF feature is not used, or if the part program already has the kerf added to the dimensions, the KERF LEFT or KERF RIGHT codes can be removed from the part program before it is loaded. This uses less memory to store the part since no kerf space is added. G45 The G45 function may be included along with the arc or line dimensions performing the lead-in to the part. Including a G45 in the data block allows the data to be altered to correctly lead into the kerf-compensated part. The G46 function selects which overlay parameter table is used for the part program. This code, followed by the table number (for example, G46 T1), loads an overlay table (Table #1) into the running parameters and uses those parameters for running the part. Indicates that all subsequent part dimensions are in inch units. Indicates that all subsequent part dimensions are in metric (millimeter) units. Signals that all subsequent dimensions are in absolute programming format. NOTE: Although the X/Y dimensions are in absolute, the I/J dimensions can be either absolute or incremental depending on the setting of SD51 - PRGM FORMAT. Signals that all subsequent dimensions are in incremental programming format. Only used in absolute programming mode. When included in a data block containing only X/Y dimensions, it causes the internal absolute registers to be set to the X/Y dimensions from the data block. No machine motion occurs. This code is useful for resetting the absolute zero position at various points in a part program to make the X/Y dimensioning of the subsequent data blocks easier. Sets program repeat pointer. Causes a jump to the G97 pointer. The G97 and G98 commands are used as a pair within a part program to perform an overall program repeat function, and also to allow loop programming within a part program.
G46
G70 G71 G90
G91 G92
G97 G98
AO-73367
PART-4:WADR-7
1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual An overall program repeat function is implemented by programming the G97 to set the repeat pointer location. This is normally very close to the start of the program. Any commands before the G97 will only be performed the first time through the part and will be skipped on each repeat pass. This is sometimes used to allow the program to start at the corner of the plate and move to the first pierce point. Then the G97 is programmed so that the move from the corner isn't repeated on each repeat of the part. When the program repeats, it only executes the commands after the G97. To set the overall repeat pointer, a G97 must be located in a data block by itself. No other information should be included in this data block. If the G97 is omitted from the program, the repeat pointer is automatically set to the first data block. For the overall repeat function to cause the automatic repeat of the part program, a G98 must be programmed at the end of the program. When this code is read, it causes the program to jump back to the point where the G97 was programmed and continues with the program from that point. Note that the G98 should be programmed in a data block by itself, and that no commands following the G98 will be executed since the program will always jump back to the G97 location. If a G98 is programmed but there was no G97 at the beginning, the program will repeat starting at the first data block. A loop programming function allows portions of a part program to be repeated a specified number of times to reduce the size of the part program. For example, if 100 equally spaced holes need to be cut in a straight line, and four data blocks are required to cut each hole, standard programming would require 400 data blocks. By using loop programming, it requires only six data blocks. This is the most common use for this type of loop programming. To program a loop, program a data block containing G97 Txxxx at the start of the portion of code to be repeated. The xxxx following the T key character specifies the number of times the loop is to be executed. If a value of T1 is programmed, it is the same as not having the loop at all since the code would be done one time anyway. The end of the loop is programmed by a data block containing only the G98 code. This is the same code as is used for the overall program repeat, but since there was a G97 Txxxx data block already programmed, the first G98 code following the G97 Txxxx data block acts as the end of the loop and not the overall program repeat. Any number of loops can be programmed in a single part however they cannot be nested. That is, the G97 Txxxx must be followed by a G98, and there cannot be a G97 Txxxx followed by another G97 Txxxx data block.
PART-4:WADR-8
AO-73367
PART PROGRAMMING: WORD ADDRESS The use of loop programming does not prevent the use of the overall program repeat function. It is still allowed to have a G97 alone in a data block at the beginning of the program to set the repeat pointer location, and a G98 at the end of the program to cause the program repeat. G103 When a LOAD/RUN operation is selected, G103 causes an automatic delete of the current program and loads new program specified by Q word in same data block as G103. For example, G103 Q12345678 causes the current program to be erased after it is done and automatically reload program Q12345678.
AO-73367
PART-4:WADR-9
1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual M CODE DESCRIPTIONS M00 Program Stop. Causes machine operation to halt and all cutting functions to be turned off. Press <START CYCLE> to resume program execution. Program End with no Rewind. You must end a Word Address program with either M02 or M30. If you are loading multiple programs, all but the last one should end with the M02 code since it does not cause a rewind. This is also true if the parts are loaded through the serial port. Program End with Rewind. The last program to be loaded can use the M30 command to stop the loading process and start the tape rewind. Cutting On. Initiates the cutting start sequence for a selected cutting system. While the cut is on, the machine moves at the speed set by the <SPEED> key. Cutting Off. Turns off the cutting process after performing any cut off sequencing. The machine moves at high traverse speed to next pierce location. Height Sensor Disable. Disables height sensor contact. Height Sensor Enable. Enables height sensor contact. Offset #1 Off. This function acts exactly opposite the M71 command and has the same ability to either be used alone (to specify OFFSET #1) or be followed by a T1 (through T8) to specify one of the eight offset pairs. When it is used, it causes the machine to offset in the negative direction from the programmed parameters. The OFFSET OFF command is normally used to cancel an OFFSET ON command, so that the machine is returned to the original position. Use the table for M71 to determine the offset parameters referenced by this command. Where the table indicates M71 T2 to set OFFSET #2 on, a M70 T2 sets OFFSET #2 off. M71 Offset #1 On. Causes the machine to offset from its current position, based on the values in the setup parameters described later. One use of this function is with a plate marking device. This command is used to offset the machine position so that the marking device is aligned where the cutting torch used to be. This allows the dimensions for the marking portion of the program to be programmed the same as the cutting moves, since the marker has been shifted into the same position that was previously occupied by the torch. After the marking moves are done, the corresponding OFFSET OFF command is used to shift the cutting torch back to the proper position, so that the program can continue with the torch at the programmed coordinates.
M02
M30
M04, M21
M03, M20
M14 M15 M70
PART-4:WADR-10
AO-73367
PART PROGRAMMING: WORD ADDRESS If M71 is used alone in a data block, it causes the machine to offset based on the setup parameter values SD40 and SD41 (same as SD80 and SD81). This supports existing programs where the M71 command is designated as the OFFSET #1 ON command. Note that the following parameters specify the same offset dimensions. The lower numbers are retained for compatibility with older software. SD40 -- Same as SD80 X Offset #1 SD41 -- Same as SD81 Y Offset #1 SD47 -- Same as SD82 X Offset #2 SD48 -- Same as SD83 Y Offset #2 There are a total of eight X/Y offset pairs supported by the 1250. These are specified by parameters SD80 - SD95. To select one of these offsets, follow the M71 by a T key character with a value of 1 to 8, which selects one of the eight offsets to be used. The following are the valid program uses: Data block: M71 M71 T1 M71 T2 M71 T3 M71 T4 M71 T5 M71 T6 M71 T7 M71 T8 Offset dimension parameters: SD80, SD81 (same as SD40, SD41) SD80, SD81 (same as SD40, SD41) SD82, SD83 (same as SD47, SD48) SD84, SD85 SD86, SD87 SD88, SD89 SD90, SD91 SD92, SD93 SD94, SD95
Note that the offsets do not have to cancel each other, and it is possible to offset more than once if necessary. To end up back at the original position, each OFFSET ON command must be canceled by its corresponding OFFSET OFF command. Also, the OFFSET OFF basically causes a negative OFFSET ON. This means that an OFFSET OFF can be used to shift in the opposite direction of the setup parameter values, and then the OFFSET ON command used to cancel the OFF move and return to the original position. M72 Offset #2 Off. This command is maintained for compatibility with older software. It causes the machine to offset in the opposite direction of the dimensions specified in SD47 and SD48 (same as SD82 and SD83). It is used to cancel the offset caused by the M73 command after the PLATE MARKER #2 portion of the program is complete. Note that this function could also be programmed by using M70 T2 as described above.
AO-73367
PART-4:WADR-11
1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual M73 Offset #2 On. This command is maintained for compatibility with older software. It causes the machine to offset based on the dimensions specified in parameters SD47 and SD48 (same as SD82 and SD83). It is used to offset for PLATE MARKER #2. Once the PLATE MARKER #2 portion of the program is complete, the offset is canceled by using the OFFSET #2 OFF command. Go to Table. This command instructs the 1250 to move to the cutting table indicated by the T key character value that follows M79. For example: M79 T3 commands to go to Table #3 (0,0) home position.
M79
PART-4:WADR-12
AO-73367
WORD ADDRESS SAMPLE PROGRAM

The following is a Word Address program for SAMPLE PART #1. (See the drawing at the end of this section.) The REF letters on the program listing refer to the circled reference points on the part drawing. After the program is a detailed description of each program line. The program is shown in both inch and metric units. This example assumes that Overlay Table #2 is used for the cutting process selected. Inch Program % N2P12345678 N5G46T2 N3X4Y-6.8 N4G97 N5M04 N6G45X.75Y.3 N7G41 N8GO3I-.75 N9X-.75Y.3 N10M03 N11X2Y-6.8 N12M04 N13G45X-.5Y.5 N14X-1.5 N15X-2I-1 N16X-1.5 N17Y4.5 N18X1.5Y1.5 N19X-1.5Y1.5 N20Y3.5 N21G02X512.5J-2.5 N22Y-11.5 N23MO3 N24X6Y6.2 N25G98 N26M30 Metric Program % N2P12345678 N5G46 T2 N3X101.6Y-172.7 N4G97 N5M04 N6G45X19.1X7.6 N7G41 N8GO3I-19.1 N9X-19.91X7.6 N10M03 N11X50.L8Y-172.7 N12M04 N13G45X-12.7Y12.7 N14X-38.1 N15X-50.8I-25.4 N16X-38.1 N17Y114.3 N18X38.1Y38.1 N19X-38.1Y38.1 N20Y88.9 N21GO2X127I63.5J-3.5 N22Y-292.1 N23M03 N24X152.4Y157.5 N25G98 N26M30 Ref Comments Start of program code Program number Overlay Table #2 Move from corner Program repeat pointer Cut on Lead-in line Set kerf left Cut CCW arc hole Lead-out Turn off cut Move to outside Turn cut on Lead-in Line Arc (still CCW) Line Line Line Line Line Arc CW Line and lead-out Cut off Move to next part Repeat program End of program
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B C D E E F G H I J K L M N O P
AO-73367
PART-4:WADR-13
1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual LINE 1 The first line of a Word Address program must contain only a % (percent sign). This serves as the program start indicator. Any characters before the % are ignored. If the % is not present or has other data in the same block, the program will not load correctly. This line contains the optional program number N identifier. When the program is loaded, this number is compared to the requested program number to ensure that the correct program was loaded. If a program number is used in a program, it must appear in the second line, immediately after the %. G46 T2 is used to select overlay parameter table 2. Any data blocks after the G46 code uses overlay parameter table number 2 until another G46 T# is given. Initial move from corner of plate to pierce point on first part. Due to the placement of the G97 code, this block is not repeated on subsequent parts. The G97 pointer is used to indicate where the program repeat should occur. Any data blocks before the G97 code are not repeated on subsequent parts. Initiate the cutting process. Cutting speed is set by the <SPEED> key or digital feedrate. This line leads in from the pierce location to the actual part. Sets the kerf compensation to the left of the cut. This command causes the DIAL-IN-KERF feature to offset the cutting path to the left and produce the correct size part. Sets the arc direction counter-clockwise to cut a 360 degree arc. This line leads out away from the part before the cutting process is turned off. If any melting occurs when the cutting process is stopped, it occurs in the scrap, away from the part. Turn off the cutting process. Move to next pierce point at high traverse speed. Initiate cutting process for outside cut. Line leads in from pierce location to part. Standard line format. Arc format. Direction is still counter-clockwise from previous G03 command. Standard line format. Standard line format. Standard line format. Standard line format. Standard line format. Standard arc format. The direction changed to clockwise by G02 command.
LINE 2
LINE 3
LINE 4
LINE 5
LINE 6 LINE 7 LINE 8
LINE 9 LINE 10
LINE 11 LINE 12 LINE 13 LINE 14 LINE 15 LINE 16 LINE 17 LINE 18 LINE 19 LINE 20 LINE 21 LINE 22
PART-4:WADR-14
AO-73367
PART PROGRAMMING: WORD ADDRESS LINE 23 Standard line format. Note that the line is .5 inches longer than part. This allows the line to also function as a lead out, away from the part before turning off the cutting process. Turn off the cutting process. Move to first pierce location on next part. G98 command causes program to repeat from point where G97 command was used. End-of-program command.
LINE 24 LINE 25 LINE 26 LINE 27
AO-73367
PART-4:WADR-15
PART DRAWING:
Sample Program 1
(Inch / millimeter dimensions)

12.00 (304.8) 6.00 (152.4) .75 (19.05) 1.00 (25.4) 3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
2.50 (63.5) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114.3)
1.00 (25.4)
2.50 (63.5) 4.50 (114.3)
C D
B E
PLATE EDGE
CUT OFF TRAVERSE MOVE
O C D .50 (12.7) N M .50/(12.7) A L K J B E H G
F
CUT ON CUTTING MOVE
CUT ON LEADIN / LEADOUT
PART-4:WADR-16
AO-73367
PART PROGRAMMING: ESSI
ESSI PROGRAMMING
ESSI PROGRAMMING
ESSI part programming uses three types of data blocks for the program. These are LINE MOVES, ARC MOVES, and AUXILIARY FUNCTION CODES.
LINE AND ARC MOVES

Both the line and arc data blocks are made up of a series of signed (+/-) dimensions. In ESSI programming, the number of signs in a data block determines whether it is an arc or a line. The dimensions for the block do not contain any decimal points, rather the number of decimal places are defined as follows: For INCH programming, two decimal places are assumed. For example: +200 +5 +9999999 equals a dimension of +2.00 inches equals a dimension of +0.05 inches maximum dimension is +/-999999.99 inches
For METRIC programming, one decimal place is assumed. For example: +200 +5 +9999999 equals a dimension of +20.0 millimeters equals a dimension of +0.5 millimeters maximum dimension is +/-999999.9 millimeters
Line and arc data blocks are defined as follows:
Blocks with two signs (either + or -), are LINE functions. The first signed value is the X incremental distance and the second signed value is the Y incremental distance. If one of the dimensions is 0, only a + sign need appear in the block. For example: Line of 1 inch in the X axis and -.5 inches in the Y axis is programmed as: +100-50 +-250 Line of -2.5 inches in the Y axis with no movement in the X axis is programmed as:
Blocks with five signs are ARC functions. For example: +X+Y+XC+YC+ The first signed dimension is the incremental distance from the start point to the end point of the ARC along the X axis. The second signed dimension is the incremental distance from the start point to the end point of the ARC along the Y axis.
AO-73367
PART-4:ESSI-1
The third signed dimension is the incremental distance from the start point to the center of the ARC along the X axis. The fourth signed dimension is the incremental distance from the start point to the center of the ARC along the Y axis. The fifth sign in the data block determines the direction of the ARC. + indicates a counter-clockwise arc, and - indicates a clockwise arc.
See the ESSI sample part for examples of arc programming. The following maximum values that can be used for X, Y, XC, and YC values: +/-99999.99 inches +/-99999.9 mm ESSI value +/-9999999 ESSI value +/-9999999
NOTE: Values that exceed these limits produce a PGM SYNTAX ERR (program syntax error.
SPECIAL NOTE ON PROGRAMMING ARCS The 1250 attempts to cut exactly what it is programmed to cut. When programming arc blocks, the distance from the start point of the arc to the center should equal the distance from the end point to the center. If the values are not equal, the 1250 uses the end point to center distance when cutting the part. The difference is a path error. As this path error increases, an undesirable cut path and machine motion occurs. The machine motion being a factor of setup parameters and machine speed. If you press <BACK UP> to go in reverse through a cut path with improperly programmed arc blocks, machine motion is affected, since machine motion is a factor of setup parameters and back up speed. TIP: To prevent the possibility of a program containing an improperly programmed arc block from making unwanted cuts, use TEST RUN before cutting the part.
ESSI AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

The third type of ESSI data block is used for the various auxiliary functions for the part program. The following is a list of the supported ESSI auxiliary function codes. 00 Program Stop. Causes machine operation to halt and all cutting functions to be turned off. Press <CYCLE START> to resume operation. The 1250 ignores all data between these two codes. Usually they are used for comments and instructions, which only appear on the program printout. Cutting On. Initiates the start sequence for selected cutting system. While the cut is on, the machine moves at the speed set by the <SPEED> key.
03, 04
07
PART-4:ESSI-2
AO-73367
08
Cutting Off. Turns off cutting process. After performing any cut off sequencing, the machine moves at high traverse speed to next pierce location. Plate Marker #1 Offset On. Causes the machine to move by the distances entered for the MARKER #1 X/Y OFFSET dimension during the SETUP AND INSTALLATION procedure. The part program does not have to compensate for the physical offset between the marker and torch. Optionally followed by a +1 to +8 causing offsets 1-8 as specified by SD80-96 to be used. See INSTALLATION & SETUP: SD80-96 OFFSETS. Plate Marker #1 Offset Off. Cancels the offset and moves the cutting torch back to the programmed position. Optionally followed by a +1 to +8 causing offsets 1-8 as specified by SD8096 to be used. See INSTALLATION & SETUP: SD80-96 OFFSETS These three commands are used by the DIAL-IN-KERF routine to compensate the cutting path for the amount of material removed by the cutting process. The kerf directions (29 for left and 30 for right) are based on which way the centerline of the torch needs to be offset as it travels along the cutting path. The 38 code is provided to cancel the kerf. It is not needed in the program, however, since the kerf is automatically turned off when not cutting. NOTE: See the description for Word Address codes G41 and G42 for details of the memory allocation for programs containing KERF LEFT or KERF RIGHT commands.
11
12
29, 30, 38
39
Programmable Feedrate. This command is followed by a numeric value in the same resolution. Example: 39+2500 is program feedrate of 25.00 IPM for inch units. In millimeter units, 39+2500 is program feedrate of 250 MMPM. Programmable Kerf. This code, along with a value in either inches or millimeters, allows feedrate commands to be inserted directly into a program. Example: 40+200 in inches the programmable kerf is 2 inches. In millimeters the program kerf would be 20 millimeters. System Dwell. This code causes a system dwell to be performed. During this time, the machine is held in position and all control outputs remain in their current condition. The dwell time is set during the installation of the control and can be changed by following ESSI code 40 with +XXXX where the dwell is specified in milliseconds. For example, 41+1000 is a one second dwell. Multiple Table Select. This ESSI code, along with a number between 0 and 4, selects one of the five available overlay data parameter tables. For example, 65+3 selects overlay table #3. Plasma Height Sensor Enable Plasma height Sensor Disable Indicates that all subsequent part dimensions are in inch units.
40
41
65
67 68 70
AO-73367
PART-4:ESSI-3
71 79
Indicates that all subsequent part dimensions are in metric (millimeter) units. Cutting Table Home Select. This code, along with a value between 0 and 4, selects the corresponding table home position. For example, 79+2 causes the machine to move to Table #2 Home (0,0) position. Indicates that all subsequent dimensions are in incremental program format. Indicates that all subsequent dimensions are in absolute program format. See SD51- PRGM FORMAT in the INSTALLATION AND SETUP section for details regarding absolute and incremental formats for the X and Y center dimensions in absolute mode. Program End with No Rewind. This code does not cause the tape to rewind at the end of the load process, and consequently allows multiple programs to be loaded. It stops the tape at the end of the first program, and then after the first program is stored, it starts loading the next one on the tape. If a rewind is desired, the last program in the list should end with the 99 code described below. These two functions are used as a pair within a part program to perform the program repeat function. 97 acts as a pointer in the program. When 98 is reached, the program jumps back to the point in the program where the 97 occurred. The program repeats to the beginning if the 97 code is not used. For example, 97+XX where XX is the loop count, causes the program to repeat XX number of times. End of Program with Rewind. Either code may be used. When loading from paper tape, this code stops the loading process and causes the tape to be rewound back to the start. If the program is being downloaded from a remote RS-232 source, this code stops the loading process and terminates the link. If multiple programs are to be loaded, the 90 code described above should be used on all but the last one. Automatic Load/Run. When a LOAD/RUN operation is selected, 103 causes an automatic delete of the current program and loads new program specified in the same data block as 103. For example, 103 12345678 causes the current program to be erased after it is done, and automatically reload 12345678.
81 82
90
97, 98
64, 99
103
PART-4:ESSI-4
AO-73367
ESSI SAMPLE PROGRAM

The following is an ESSI program for Sample Part #1. (See the drawing at the end of this section.) The REF letters in the program listing refer to the circled reference points on the part drawing. After the program is a detailed description of each program line. The program is shown in both inch and metric units. # 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Inch Program +400-680 97 07 08 29 ++-75++ -75+30 08 +200-680 07 -50+50 -150+ -200+0-100+0+0 -150+ ++450 +150+150 -150+150 ++350 +500+0+250+-250+-1150 08 +400+620 98 99 Metric Program +1016-1727 97 07 08 29 ++-191++ -191+76 08 +508-1727 07 -127+127 -381+ -508+0-254+0+ -381+ ++1143 381+381 381+381 ++889 +1270+0+635-635 +-2921 08 +1016+1575 98 99 Ref A Comments Move from corner Program repeat pointer Cut on Lead-out Set kerf left Cut counter-clockwise holes Lead-out Lead-out Move to outside Cut on Lead-in Line Counter-clockwise arc Line Line Line Line Line Clockwise arc Line and lead-out Cut off Move to next part Repeat program End of program
B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
AO-73367
PART-4:ESSI-5
LINE 1
Initial move from corner of plate to pierce point on first part. Due to the placement of the 97 code, this block does not repeat on subsequent parts. The 97 pointer is used to indicate where the program repeat should occur. Any data blocks before the 97 code do not repeat on subsequent parts. Initiate the cutting process. The cutting speed set by the <SPEED> key. This line leads in from the pierce location to the actual part. Sets the kerf compensation to the left of the cut. This command causes the DIAL-IN-KERF feature to offset the cutting path to the left and thus produce the correct size part. Standard arc format. The arc direction is counter-clockwise, since the fifth sign is +. Note: zero dimensions (+0) are included for clarity. Only the sign of the dimension is actually needed for the part. This block cuts a 360 degree arc. This line leads out from the part before the cutting process is turned off. If any melting occurs when the cutting process is stopped, it occurs in the scrap, away from the part. Turn off the cutting process. Move to next pierce point at high traverse speed. Initiate cutting process for outside cut. Line leads in from the pierce location to part. Standard line format. Standard arc format. The direction is counter-clockwise, since the fifth sign is +. Note: zero dimensions (+0) are included for clarity. Only the sign is actually needed for the part program. Standard line format. Standard line format. Standard line format. Standard line format. Standard line format. Standard arc format. The direction is clockwise, since the fifth sign is -. Standard line format. Note: The line is .5 inches longer than the part. This allows the line to also function as a lead out from the part before turning off the cutting process. Turn off the cutting process. Move to first pierce location on next part. The 98 command causes program to repeat from the point where the 97 command was used. End-of-program command.
LINE 2
LINE 3 LINE 4 LINE 5
LINE 6
LINE 7
LINE 8 LINE 9 LINE 10 LINE 11 LINE 12 LINE 13
LINE 14 LINE 15 LINE 16 LINE 17 LINE 18 LINE 19 LINE 20
LINE 21 LINE 22 LINE 23 LINE 24
PART-4:ESSI-6
AO-73367
Part Drawings - Sample Program 1

Inch / Millimeter Dimensions
12.00 (304.8) 6.00 (152.4) .75 (19.05) 1.00 (25.4) 3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
2.50 (63.5) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114.3)
1.00 (25.4)
2.50 (63.5) 4.50 (114.3)
C D
B E
PLATE EDGE CUT OFF TRAVERSE MOVE

F
O C D B E H L M .50/(12.7) K J G
CUT ON CUTTING CUT ON LEADIN LEADOUT
MOVE .50
(12.7) N
LETTERS IN CIRCLES DENOTE DATA BLOCK LETTERS IN EXAMPLE.
AO-73367
PART-4:ESSI-7
BLANK
COMMUNICATIONS: SERIAL
Serial communications is a feature of the 1250 and must be enabled for operation. CADLINK (CLINK) and Communication Enhancement are special protocols used with this feature, and must also be enabled before they will operate. To see if these features are enabled, use the DSPY 80 - CONFIGURE mode to display the system serial number, software version, and the amount of memory installed in the unit. Press <ENTER> to display a list of the available features. Either ON or OFF is displayed next to the feature name, indicating whether or not it is enabled in the unit. Press <ENTER> or use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll through the features to see if they are enabled. For more information on DISPLAY 80, see the section on DISPLAY MODES. If a particular feature is required, but not enabled, consult the factory.
Serial communications is the transferring of data between two devices over a communications link. For a communications link to operate properly, the characteristics of the transmitting and receiving devices must match. If they do not, the program will either not load at all, or will be interpreted incorrectly. The 1250 can adjust the following characteristics to match the external device.

PROTOCOL PROGRAM TYPE CHARACTER TYPE BAUD RATE
RTS/CTS, XON/XOFF and special devices Word Address, ESSI, and specials Number of data bits, parity 110 to 9600 (110 to 230K for 1250+)
The same factors affect both the receiving and transmitting characteristics of the system. Therefore, once they are set they should function in either direction. These characteristics can be set for the system in one of two ways:
Any or all of the characteristics can be permanently set into the unit by setting the appropriate value in the SD50 - SERIAL DEFN variable during the machine setup procedure (see INSTALLATION & SETUP). If a value is set using this method, it is automatically used any time a serial operation is performed. This would be the case if the same serial device is used all the time or if a permanent connection to a remote computer is installed. This requires the least input during operation, since the values are already set. A zero value may be entered for any or all of the four selections during the setup procedure. During operation, you are prompted for the particular characteristic each time a serial operation is performed. Each parameter can be set independently, allowing some to be entered each time while presetting others. This is useful if the same remote device were being used every time, but with programs using both ESSI and Word Address languages. Everything but the program type could be preset, requiring you to enter only the program type.
AO-73367
PART-5:SERIAL-1
When you select LOAD- FROM RS-232 or STORE- TO RS-232, the preset value is checked. If all four parameters are set, the system automatically goes on to the actual loading or storing procedure. However, if any or all of the parameters are set to 0, the system prompts you for the required selections. If the PROTOCOL parameter is set to 0, you must select the desired protocol from the following menu: PROTCL-1=RTS/CTS PROTCL-2=XON/XOFF PROTCL-3=BURNY 4 PROTCL-5=CASS 1 PROTCL-5=PTAPE 1 PROTCL-6=CLINK 1 Standard hardware protocol, using request to send and clear to send (RTS/CTS). Standard software protocol, using XON and XOFF control characters. Special protocol used to communicate with BURNY 4 controls. Not used. Special protocol used to communicate with a spooling tape reader. Special protocol for communication with remote CAD programming center.
A detailed description of each of these protocols is provided in this section. If the PROGRAM TYPE parameter is set to 0, you must select the type of program to be loaded or stored from the following menu: PGM TYPE-1=WADR PGM TYPE-2=ESSI PGM TYPE-3=INTL PGM TYPE-4=WADR1 PGM TYPE-5=WADR2 PGM TYPE-6=WADR3 PGM TYPE-7=ESSI1 Standard 1250 Word Address program Standard 1250 ESSI program. Test format; not for normal use. Special Word Address program, type 1. Special Word Address program, type 2. Special Word Address program, type 3. Special ESSI program, type 1.
Specifications for the various program types are found in the PART PROGRAMMING section of this manual. If the CHARACTER FORMAT parameter is set to 0, you must select the desired character format from the following menu: CHAR TYPE-1 CHAR TYPE-2 CHAR TYPE-3 CHAR TYPE-4 CHAR TYPE-5 CHAR TYPE-6 CHAR TYPE-7 NP7D: ASCII, no parity, 7 data bits NP8D: ASCII, no parity, 8 data bits EP7D: ASCII, even parity, 7 data bits (standard) EP8D: ASCII, even parity, 8 data bits OP7D: ASCII, odd parity, 7 data bits OP8D: ASCII, odd parity, 8 data bits EIA: EIA, RS-244 odd parity format
PART-5:SERIAL-2
AO-73367
NOTE:
Two (2) stop bits are always sent, one (1) or two (2) may be received.
If the BAUD RATE parameter is set to 0, you must select the baud rate for communications from the following menu:
FOR 1250 BAUD RATE-1 BAUD RATE-2 BAUD RATE-3 BAUD RATE-4 BAUD RATE-5 BAUD RATE-6 BAUD RATE-7 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600
ADD FOR 1250 PLUS BAUD RATE-8 BAUD RATE-9 BAUD RATE-A BAUD RATE-B BAUD RATE-C BAUD RATE-D 19.2 K 28.8 K 38.4 K 57.6 K 115.2 K 230 K
Once all the parameters are set, the 1250 initiates the transmission by setting its output status line to the active condition and then waits for the external device to enable its port. A ** WAITING ** message is displayed until the external device comes on-line. The 1250 then delays for one second before beginning communications. If you press <RECYCLE> before the operation is complete, the process is aborted and RECYCLE ABORT is displayed. Press <RECYCLE> again to return to the top menu selection. During a LOAD or STORE operation, the display shows the actual number of bytes being used to store the data. XXXXXXXX LOADED is displayed when a LOAD operation is successfully completed. Press <RECYCLE> to return to the main prompting menu. If the serial device being used disables its status line during the communication, the display changes to WAITING until the port comes back on-line. Any errors that occur during a serial I/O operation are listed in the ERROR MESSAGES section of this manual.
THE COMMUNICATION PORT

The 1250 is equipped with an isolated RS-232/RS-422 serial communication port, which is used to connect to host computers and other serial devices. The communication port contains isolated RS-232/RS-422 electronics, status LEDs, audio beeper, a 9-pin output connector, and an internal RS-232/RS-422 selector switch. There are for sets of red/green LEDs, which show the state of the input/output signals. Green means the signal is low or off, while the red means the signal is high or on. When
AO-73367
PART-5:SERIAL-3
the unit is sending or receiving data, the LEDs blink, showing the passage of the serial data stream.
The 1250 port can be configured for either RS-232 or RS-422 level signals. The RS232/RS-422 status LEDs on the unit indicate the current settings. To change the selection, you must open the door to reveal the 232/422 selection switches. There are three switches. All three switches must be thrown in the same direction. Set the switch to the desired setting and close the door.
PART-5:SERIAL-4
AO-73367
INTERNAL VIEW OF MO-07320
CONNECTING TO RS-232C DEVICES

RS-232C is an abbreviation for Recommended Standard 232, Revision C. This standard comes from the engineering department of the Electronic Industries Association (EIA). RS-232C defines the wiring between two serial devices. It also defines the purpose of 25 different wires, which pins they should terminate on, and even what voltage levels, current drains and loads are allowed. Of the 25 pins/wires defined by the standard, only 11 are used for asynchronous communications. The others are used for synchronous communication or are reserved for future use. Although there are 11 used for asynchronous communication, the 1250 can communicate with as few as three (transmit, receive, and ground) using software handshaking, or as many as five (transmit, receive, RTS, CTS, and signal common) using hardware handshaking. This means that either a three-wire or five-wire cable could connect the 1250 and a host storage device. NOTE: The host storage device could be a computer, tape punch, another 1250, or any other type of serial device.
AO-73367
PART-5:SERIAL-5
RS-232 PIN CONFIGURATION

The MO-07320 serial output adapter uses an industrial round nine-pine AMP connector for its serial output, rather than the normal (and somewhat fragile) D-subminiature connector found on most computers and RS-232 devices. The following is a description of each of the nine pins of the port. Signal Name SHIELD RIN XOUT Port A Pin PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 GND CTRL-OUT STAT-IN PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9 Description Protective shield. Do not tie to PIN 7. Received data input to 1250. Transmitted data output from 1250. +5 VDC @ 25mA +12 VDC @ 25mA. May be used for pull-up. -12 VDC @ 25mA Signal ground. Control status line. Output from 1250 Input status line. Input to 1250
NOTE: CTRL-OUT and STAT-IN are used rather than the more conventional RTS or CTS, since these imply specific data set and data terminal definitions and do not function identically on all serial devices. By choosing more general names, the correct connection to the remote equipment must be made based on signal function rather than assuming the same named pins are automatically connected. The signal levels from the 1250 are RS-232 compatible and could be connected directly to a remote computer up to 50 feet away using any type of standard cable, or up to 500 feet away with special RS-232 extended distance cable. To use RS-232 communications over 500 feet requires the addition of short haul direct wire or fiber optic modems to boost the range. The RS-422 setting of the 1250 serial port allows for direct connection to RS-422 devices over one mile away and may be the better choice for long distance links. See the section on RS-422 communications later in this chapter for further details. The MO-07320 RS-232/422 output adapter assembly provides total electrical isolation between the 1250 internal electronics and the transmission wire to the remote computer or serial device. As long as the distance between the two devices is within RS-232 or 422 specifications, no additional isolation is needed to protect against ground loops or power system problems. However, there can be considerable electrical noise generated on the wires leading from the 1250 to the remote computer. While this will not harm the 1250 due to its built-in isolation, the noise could damage the input circuitry at the remote computer. For this reason, we recommend that all installations include some sort of transient protection and isolation at the serial port of the remote computer to protect it against line-induced noise damage. There are also RS-422 to RS-232 conversion modems available that also provide this type of isolation and transient protection. By setting the 1250 for RS-422 communication, and using one of these RS-422 to 232 modems, the proper isolation and transient protection is achieved, along with increasing
PART-5:SERIAL-6 AO-73367
the maximum transmission distance. See the RS-422 section of this chapter for further details.
RS-232 FOR HARDWARE HANDSHAKING

The following drawings show the typical connection from a 1250 to the standard 25-Pin and 9-Pin RS-232 connectors found on most IBM compatible computers and peripherals. For hardware handshaking, five wires are required: transmit data, receive data, RTS, CTS, and signal common.
AO-73367
PART-5:SERIAL-7
RTS/CTS HARDWARE PROTOCOL

25 PIN D-SUB AT COMPUTER TD 2 RD 3 RTS CTS 4 5 1250 SERIAL I/O PORT 2 RD 3 TD 9 STATUS IN 8 CONTROL OUT 7 COM.
COM. 7 DSR 6
CD 1 DTR 20

9 PIN D-SUB AT COMPUTER TD 3 RD 2 RTS CTS 7 8 1250 SERIAL I/O PORT 2 RD 3 TD 9 STATUS IN 8 CONTROL OUT 7 COM.
COM. 5 DSR 6
CD 1 DTR 4
PART-5:SERIAL-8
AO-73367
RS-232 FOR SOFTWARE HANDSHAKING

The following drawings show the typical connection from a 1250 to the standard 25-Pin and 9-Pin RS-232 connectors found on most IBM compatible computers and peripherals. Since software handshaking uses transmitted characters to control the data flow instead of separate hardware lines, only three wires are required: transmitted data, received data, and signal common.
AO-73367
PART-5:SERIAL-9
XON/XOFF SOFTWARE PROTOCOL

25 PIN D-SUB AT COMPUTER TD 2 RD 3 RTS CTS 4 5 1250 SERIAL I/O PORT 2 RD 3 TD 9 STATUS IN 5 + 12V 7 COM.
COM. 7 DSR 6
CD 8 DTR 20

9 PIN D-SUB AT COMPUTER TD 3 RD 2 RTS CTS 7 8 1250 SERIAL I/O PORT 2 RD 3 TD 9 STATUS IN 5 +12V 7 COM.
COM. 5 DSR 6
CD 1 DTR 4
PART-5:SERIAL-10
AO-73367
CONNECTING TO RS-422 DEVICES

The serial port on the 1250 may be configured for either RS-232 or RS-422 operation. RS-232 is more limited in distance, and in some cases, may be more susceptible to noise, since it is a single-ended ground reference signal. RS-422 is a differential signal type signal, which permits longer transmission distances (over one mile) and better noise immunity. If the remote computer is equipped with an RS-422 compatible port, the 1250 could be connected directly to it. However, while the RS-422 port on the 1250 is electrically isolated from the internal circuitry, the RS-422 port on the remote computer may not be. Therefore, even though a modem is not required to extend the distance of the transmission, we recommend that some sort of modem or transient protection device be installed at the host computer to protect it from line-induced noise. Most computers have only RS-232 level serial ports and require an RS-422 to RS-232 converting modem. This has two benefits. First, it provides the long distance transmission capability of the RS-422 signals. Second, if the proper type of modem is selected, it provides complete electrical isolation between the long transmission wire and the computers sensitive serial port. The 1250 has such a modem available as an accessory item. Part number MO-06707-0 includes a 115 VAC adapter while MO06707-1 includes a 230 VAC 50/60 HZ adapter. This modem provides the proper electrical isolation to protect the host computer port. Since the 1250s RS-422 port only supports the transmit and receive lines, hardware handshaking (RTS/CTS) isnt possible. Consequently, the host computer must use software handshaking (XON/XOFF) to control the data flow between the 1250 and the host computer. Signal levels are RS-422 compatible. Only the following signals are used in the RS-422 mode: SIGNAL NAME SHIELD PORT PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 GROUND PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9 DESCRIPTION Protective shield. Do not connect to signal ground. B - Received data input from 1250 B - Transmitted data output from 1250 +5 VDC @ 25mA +12 VDC @ 25mA 12 VDC @ 25mA Signal ground. Do not connect to shield ground. A - Transmitted data output to 1250 A - Received data input to 1250
AO-73367
PART-5:SERIAL-11
PART-5:SERIAL-12
AO-73367
CHARACTER FORMATS
The 1250 accepts several different character formats. The most common are: ASCII (RS-358) EIA (RS-244) Even parity, 7 data bits, 1 or 2 stop bits Odd parity, 8 data bits, 1 or 2 stop bits (Flexowriter). (EIA RS-244 does not support some functions and codes and cannot be used if software handshaking is used, since there are no control codes defined in the RS-244 specification.)
You select the character format either during INSTALLATION AND SETUP, or when the serial I/O operation is selected. For the remainder of this description the < > symbols are used to indicate specific characters as follows: <CR> <EOB> <XON> <RON> <XOFF> <ROFF> <EOF> <NULL> Hex 0D Hex 0A Hex 11 Hex 12 Hex 13 Hex 14 Hex 04 Hex 00 ASCII carriage return ASCII end-of-block (also line feed) ASCII DC1 (transmitter on) ASCII DC2 (receiver on) ASCII DC3 (transmitter off) ASCII DC4 (receiver off) ASCII end-of-file Blank tape
The hex code shown must have the appropriate parity bit added to the code. The actual program format can be one of several types, as listed in the programming section of this manual.
HANDSHAKING PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONS

Handshaking is the way in which the data flow between the 1250 and the host storage device is regulated and controlled. There are basically two types used by the 1250. The first type is hardware handshaking, which uses the status in and control out signal lines (RTS and CTS) to control the data that flows through the transmit and receive lines. The second type is software handshaking, which uses special characters to control the flow of data between two serial devices. They are <XON> for transmitter on and <XOFF> for transmitter off.

NOTE: RTS/CTS hardware protocol is not supported when the port is configured as an RS-422 port.
AO-73367
PART-5:SERIAL-13
The RTS/CTS hardware protocol uses electrical control signals defined by the RS-232 standard to regulate the transmission. The 1250 has one input status line and one output control line to perform this handshaking. The status input to the 1250 should be connected to a suitable status output signal from the external device. Similarly, the 1250 output should be connected to a status input line on the remote device. Traditionally, these two signals have been called request-to-send (RTS - control output) and clear-to-send (CTS - status input). However, the exact definition may vary, thus they are referred to as only the status input and control output lines. In this way, it implies that they should be connected to give the correct function, not necessarily to the pin bearing the same name. By using this type of handshaking, either the 1250 or the external device can control the data transmission. This compensates for data that may be transmitted faster than a particular device can process it. If no handshaking is used, data can be lost due to this processing time. With the handshaking, either device can stop the transmission until it is ready to accept more data.

The XON/XOFF software protocol uses special ASCII control characters to control the communication process. Since the EIA (RS-244) character format does not have equivalent characters for these codes, it cannot be used with software protocol. The following four ASCII codes are used: <XON> <RON> <XOFF> <ROFF> DC1 - Transmitter on DC2 - Receiver on DC3 - Transmitter off DC4 - Receiver off >11 >12 >13 >14
<RON> and <ROFF> are used by the transmitter to signal the receiving device before the actual data transmission begins. In most cases, these codes are ignored. <XON> and <XOFF> are used by the receiving device to turn the senders transmitter on or off and thus control the data transmission. In a typical case, the sender transmits <RON> and then begins sending the data. If the receiver cannot process the data fast enough, it sends <XOFF> back, causing the data to stop. When the receiver is ready for more data, it sends <XON> and the transmitter starts sending data again. NOTE: When the 1250 is receiving data from a host computer, it sends <XOFF> when it needs to stop the data transmission to process the data already received. The remote computer must stop sending data within three characters after receiving the <XOFF> code. If it does not stop, it causes an OVERRUN error at the 1250 and the download is terminated. Since software <XON> / <XOFF> handshaking uses control codes sent over the same wires as the transmitted data, a three-wire link (RS-232) is possible: transmit, receive and signal common. Some types of short haul modems only support this type of link, since they only provide for one signal to be transmitted in each direction.
PART-5:SERIAL-14
AO-73367
NOTE: When the MO-7320 Serial Output Adapter is set for RS-232 mode, and software <XON> / <XOFF> handshaking is used, the status-input line must be kept at a high level. Tie Pin 5 to Pin 9 on the nine-pin output connector when software protocol is selected.
SPECIAL HANDSHAKING PROTOCOLS

The 1250 also supports some special handshaking protocols designed for specific devices: 3- BURNY 1V 5- PTAPE Special protocol to communicate with BURNY 1V controls Special protocol to communicate with Spooling Tape Readers
These protocols should only be used when communicating with these devices.
COMMUNICATION ENHANCEMENT FEATURE

COMMUNICATION ENHANCEMENT is one of two optional communication protocols, which can be used to provide a more automated link between the host computer and the 1250. When this feature is installed, the 1250 transmits a request to the host computer when you select a LOAD- FROM RS232 operation. The remote computer can interpret this request and send back the corresponding program without operator assistance at the computer. This allows for unattended operation of the computer and makes for a more automatic, more efficient link.
For LOAD operations, the 1250 sends the following header when a new program is requested: DOWNLOAD PROGRAM:12345678 <CR><EOB> (Program 12345678 is used as an example.)
LOAD- FROM RS232 -- USING RTS/CTS (Hardware Handshaking)

Select the LOAD- FROM RS232 function and enter the desired program number. When you press <ENTER>, additional communication parameter prompts may be displayed (as set by SD50). Once the parameters are entered, the 1250 turns on its control line and waits for the remote device to signal it is ready to receive data, by sensing the status input line. At this point, if the COMMUNICATION ENHANCEMENT feature is enable, the 1250 sends 10 <null> characters, delays for one second, and then sends the following message: DOWNLOAD PROGRAM:12345678 <CR><EOB> (Program 12345678 is used as an example.) The remote device begins transmission of the program. If the 1250 needs to halt the transmission, it turns off its control output line, which should cause the remote device to
AO-73367
PART-5:SERIAL-15
stop sending data. The 1250 turns the control output line back on when data transmission can resume. If the COMMUNICATION ENHANCEMENT feature is not enabled in the system when the End-of-program code is received, the 1250 turns off its control output line while the program load is finishing. If the program ends with the Program End/Rewind code, the download software terminates and displays PROGRAM LOADED. However, if the program just loaded ended with the Program End code (no rewind), the download software finishes loading the first program, and after a slight pause, turns the control output line back on and displays WAITING FOR NEXT. This allows multiple programs to be loaded by ending the programs with the Program End code (no rewind). Each program is loaded based on the program number defined by the P block in the program (see individual Word Address/ESSI specifications). If a program does not specifically define a program number, the 1250 assigns a number with the first digit containing an A to indicate that it was assigned. If the COMMUNICATION ENHANCEMENT feature is enabled when the End-of-program code is received, the 1250 sends a termination message of <BEL> <BEL> <BEL> EOF:### <CR> <LF> where ### represents a three digit status code. A complete list of the status codes and their translations is located at the end of this section. The 1250 then turns off its control output line, finishes loading the program and then either terminates the download with a PROGRAM LOADED message, or re-enables its port for the next program as described in the section above. The device sending the program can indicate an end-of-file (EOF) condition by sending an ASCII Control-D (hex 04). This character indicates that the download link should be terminated. This special EOF character can be used by the host computer to indicate that the program requested does not exist by sending only the EOF code. The 1250 detects that only the EOF was sent and displays NO PROGRAM FOUND. The EOF character does not have to be used for normal downloading.
TYPICAL LOAD- FROM RS232 USING XON/XOFF (Software Handshaking)

Download to the 1250 using software handshaking requires that the remote device support <XON>/<XOFF> software conventions.

Press <SHF> and enter the program number to receive the data. Make the various parameter selections. The 1250 turns on its control line and waits for the status input line to indicate that the remote device is ready (these can be tied together). The 1250 indicates that transmission can start by sending: <XON><RON><10 NULLS><ROFF>. The 1250 waits one second, and then sends another <XON>
If the COMMUNICATION ENHANCEMENT feature is enabled, the 1250 sends the following message to request the specific program: <RON> DOWNLOAD PROGRAM:12345678 <CR><EOB>
PART-5:SERIAL-16
AO-73367
The remote device can begin transmission any time after receive the <XON> character. If the 1250 needs to halt the transmission, it sends an <XOFF> character, which should cause the remote device to stop sending data. The 1250 sends an <XON> character when the transmission can resume. NOTE: The status input line on the 1250 must be kept at a high level when software handshaking is used.
When the End-of-program code is received, the 1250 sends a communication link termination message of <BEL><BEL><BEL>EOF:###<CR><LF> where ### represents one of the three-digit status codes listed at the end of this section. The 1250 then sends an <XOFF> <ROFF> and then turns off its output status line.
CAD LINK (CLINK) PROTOCOL

CLINK is another special communications protocol, which allows the 1250 to send and receive part cutting programs from a remote computer via commands sent through the RS-232 port. The host computer can be programmed to use this protocol to provide a totally automatic link. An operator is not required at the host computer. Currently there are four basic commands that are supported. <ESC>!FD <ESC>!FG <ESC>!FQ <ESC>!QQ File data command File get command File queue command File quit command
CLINK uses XON/XOFF software handshaking to control the flow of data between the two devices. A character-by character check for XON or XOFF (>11 & >13) codes is done. The 1250 does not support any block type protocols.
FILE DATA <ESC>!FD

This command is used in two different ways. For the 1250 to send a program to the remote computer, the program data must be preceded by a FILE DATA command string. The message is a sequence of characters incorporating the desired program number. For example, for the 1250 to send program number 8765 to the remote computer, the following message would be sent first: <ESC>!FD8765<CR><LF> where: ESC ! FD 8765 is the ASCII escape character is the ASCII exclamation point is the abbreviated command for FILE DATA is the program number stored in the 1250, which is sent to the computer. The number is sent as ASCII numeric characters.
PART-5:SERIAL-17
AO-73367
<CR> <LF>
is the ASCII carriage return character is the ASCII line feed character.
The 1250 pauses for one second and then begins to send program data as follows: <CR><LF> % P8765 ... PROGRAM DATA ... ... ... ... PROGRAM DATA M30<CR><LF> ^Z<CR><LFl <ESC>!QQ###<CR><LF> where: ESC ! QQ ### <CR> <LF> ^Z is the ASCII escape character is the ASCII exclamation point is the abbreviated command for FILE QUIT is a three-digit status code is the ASCII carriage return character is the ASCII line feed character is the ASCII Control-Z character. signal for end of program data status code sent by the 1250
FILE GET <ESC>!FG

The 1250 requests a program from the storage computer, by specifying a program number of up to eight digits. (Only numeric file names are used, no alphabetic characters are allowed.) The message is a sequence of characters incorporating the desired program number. For example, to request program number 12345, the 1250 sends the following sequence to the computer. <ESC>!FG12345<CR><LF> where: ESC ! FG 12345 is the ASCII escape character is the ASCII exclamation point is the abbreviated command for FILE GET is the program number requested from the storage computer. The storage computer should interpret this command and send
PART-5:SERIAL-18
AO-73367
back the appropriate ASCII file on the store computer preceded by a FILE DATA command. Thus, the FILE GET command is always sent by the requesting device and the FILE DATA command always precedes transmission of the actual program for either storing or retrieving data to/from the remote computer. <CR> <LF> is the ASCII carriage return character is the ASCII line feed character.
NOTE: The remote computer cannot request a program from the 1250. All transfers are initiated at the 1250 only. If the 1250 issues a FILE GET request to the remote computer for a program (12345 for example) that does not exist, the remote computer should send the following response: <ESC>!FD12345<CR><LF><^Z> where the ^Z termination character is sent immediately after the FILE DATA header, indicating the program does not exist. The 1250 then displays PGM NOT FOUND.
FILE QUEUE <ESC>!FQ

The FILE QUEUE command allows the 1250 to make a request to the storage computer for the next program in its queue. There is no program number sent with the FILE QUEUE command. The storage computer must acknowledge the <ESC>!FQ request with <ESC>!FD########<CR><LF>, pause once second, and then send the program that is next on the queue. NOTE: An acknowledgment of <ESC>!FD<CR><LF> with no program number also works. However, the actual file that is sent to the 1250 must contain a program number block, such as P12345678 for Word Address. If no program number block is included in the program, the 1250 creates a program number of FFFFFFFF for that file.
FILE QUIT <ESC>!QQ

Once a file has been transferred from the storage computer to the 1250, the 1250 send an <ESC>!QQ### followed by a three-digit status code. The status codes are listed at the end of this section. The following example assumes you request program number 12345 from the storage computer. <ESC>!FG12345<CR><LF> Request message sent to storage computer by 1250 <ESC>!FD12345<CR><LF> (Storage computer sends acknowledgment to 1250) One second pause
AO-73367
PART-5:SERIAL-19
<CR><LF> %<CR><LF> M30<CR><LF> ^Z<CR><LF> <ESC>!QQ0<CR><LF>
Sends <CR><LF> before % Storage computer begins to send ASCII file End of program code Signal for End-Of-Program data Program completed, no errors
Program data sent by storage computer to 1250
NOTE: Once digit of 0 is returned on a successful completion with no errors. All other status codes are three digits.
THREE DIGIT STATUS CODES

Normal completion: 000 Load process errors: 102 104 106 108 110 112 System error System error System error System error Data format error (program syntax) EOF error (no end-of-program code) No error
Program memory errors: 202 204 206 208 210 264 I/O Operation errors: 302 304 306 308 310 312 314 316 System error <RECYCLE> key abort Device off-line Device not ready Read time-out Write time-out Parity error Overrun error Memory disabled System error Program size error (exceeds 128k bytes) Memory invalid Memory full Custom auxiliary code table error
PART-5:SERIAL-20
AO-73367
318 320
Framing error Data handshake error
AO-73367
PART-5:SERIAL-21
BLANK
INSTALLATION AND SETUP: SERVICE
SERVICING THE CONTROL
Read this section before servicing the control. Before any type of service work is done on the 1250, there are some precautions that should be taken.
BACK-UP PROGRAMS STORED IN THE 1250

The 1250 has a battery system that maintains power to the memory even when the AC power to the unit is removed. This keeps the programs stored in memory from being erased when the power is turned off. While this battery system is reliable, there are still cases where something causes the stored programs to be lost. Sometimes it can be a failure of a component inside the 1250, or it can be an outside event, such as a lightning strike, or even dropping a plate on top of the control. There are also cases where a new version of software requires the memory to be erased and all programs re-loaded. Regardless of the cause, there are cases where all the programs stored in memory are lost. For this reason, any important programs should always have a back-up copy stored away from the 1250. This way, after the damage is repaired or the defective component is replaced, the important programs can be re-loaded from the back-up copy. NOTE: It is important that the back-up copy is stored away from the 1250 since the back-up copy may be damaged along with the control (in the case of a dropped plate or lightning strike). If the programs are stored on a host computer, make sure there are back-up copies of the computer data, since a problem there (such as a hard disk crash) could cause the loss of program information. If the programs are stored inside the 1250 only, the RS-232 port on the control can be used to store the programs to one of several sources. If the unit is equipped with an internal floppy disk, copy all important programs to a floppy disk, and remove the floppy from the unit. We also recommend a second floppy disk containing the same information. If there is no internal floppy, the RS-232 port can be used to send the programs to a host computer. This requires software in the host computer that is capable of accepting the programs from the 1250 and storing them to a disk file. After the programs are sent to the computer, make back-up copies of the computer programs and store them away from the computer. Finally, there are portable floppy disk systems available that can accept programs from the 1250 RS-232 port and store them directly to a floppy disk. Again, more than one copy is advised. It is your responsibility to maintain back-up copies of all important programs. All programs must be backed up before any service work is done to the control or before software is updated. This will prevent any loss of program information.
AO-73367
PART-6:SERVICE-1
BEFORE CALLING THE FACTORY

Before you call the factory for any type of assistance it is important that you have the serial number and software version date code. Use DISPLAY MODE 80 to get this information.
DISPLAY MODE 80- CONFIGURE displays the system serial number, software version, and the amount of memory installed in the unit. Press <ENTER> to view a list of all the available features. Either ON or OFF is displayed next to the features, indicating whether or not the feature is enabled in the unit.
When first selected, the display continuously scrolls through the following: SERIAL xxxxxxxxx VERSION mm/yy/dd HDW TYPE -10 ____K INSTALLED : Serial Number : Software Version : Hardware version number : Amount of memory
NOTE: Before calling regarding a service or operation problem, use DSPY-80 and write down the serial number and software version number displayed on the readout. This will aid the service personnel in determining the type of system, and the software installed. The serial number must be the one displayed on the readout, not the one found on a label somewhere on the enclosure.
PART-6:SERVICE-2
AO-73367
INSTALLATION AND SETUP: INSTALL
INSTALLATION AND SETUP

This section describes SERVICE MODE displays and adjustment procedures for the 1250. The displays show machine conditions and can be helpful in diagnosing a problem. In addition, the SERVICE MODE permits adjustment of the operating characteristics of the control in order to tailor it to a specific machine. Once the operation has been adjusted for optimum performance, the parameters are stored in non-volatile memory. This ensures that the operation of the control remains consistent and not affected by power failures. NOTE: This section describes certain parameters that are common to only one type of cutting, such as BLEED-OFF time, which is used in oxygen/fuel cutting, or ARC DELAY, which is for plasma cutting. These may not be used on all cutting machines, depending on the type of cutting tools installed. Explanations are given for the majority of possible cutting tool configurations.
SERVICE MODE KEY

Throughout this section, there are references to the <SERVICE> key. This key is not labeled on the operators panel, since there is no need for it during normal operation. The <SERVICE> key is located approximately four inches from the right side of the panel and 1.5 inches from the top of the panel (see figure). This key may be pressed at any time, during any operation, to enter the SERVICE mode main menu. When the desired service function is complete, press <SERVICE> and SERV00- EXIT to exit the service mode and return to the previous operation.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-1
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS
Most of the DISPLAY functions are described in the DISPLAY MODES section of this manual. However, several of the displays are not used during normal operation and so are not covered in that section. Most of the DISPLAY functions are also available by pressing the <SERVICE> key. If you choose a DISPLAY function (by pressing <DSPY>), values can be displayed but not changed. If the same function is selected as a SERVICE function (by pressing <SERVICE>), values are also displayed, but may be altered by entering the desired values. Some of the SERVICE functions are not available through the <DSPY> key.
POWER UP DIAGNOSTICS
When you first power-up the 1250, it automatically performs several diagnostic checks. These are indicated on the readout as they are being performed. Normally it should continue to sequence through the tests and then automatically start normal operation. If a problem is detected, the testing stops and an error message is displayed. In most cases, this indicates a problem with circuitry and should be reported to the factory for information on repair or replacement. The final test before normal operation begins is a check of the keypad to detect any shorted keys. Since no keys are supposed to be pressed during the power-up sequence, the test routine checks that all keys are open and then allows normal operation to begin. If a shorted key is found, an error message is displayed (KEYBOARD ERR- XX), where XX is the key that is closed, from the following table: XX 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 40 41 45 Key Name <0> <1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> <9> <+/-> <.> <ENTER> <CE> <DSPY> <SERVICE> <SPEED> XX 46 66 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8E
UP DOWN
Key Name <I> <SHF> <JOG UP> <JOG DOWN> <JOG RIGHT> <JOG LEFT> <JOG LATCH> <NC RUN> <CYCLE START> <CYCLE STOP> <BACK UP> <PART RET.> scroll arrow key scroll arrow key <DSPY> <RECYCLE>
PART-6:INSTAL-2
AO-73367
SERVICE MODE
You may press <SERVICE> at any time, during any operation, to access the SERVICE FUNCTION menu. When you press <SERVICE>, the readout displays SERV00- EXIT MODE. Use the UP or DOWN scroll arrow keys to enter the SERVICE FUNCTION number to select the desired SERVICE FUNCTION from the following list. Once the correct value is displayed, press <ENTER> to access the function. NOTE: Since the DISPLAY mode accesses many of the same functions as the SERVICE mode, the following menu also displays the various DISPLAY FUNCTIONS.
SERVICE MODE MENU

SERV00- EXIT MODE SERV01- X/Y DISPLAY SERV02- PARTS CUT SERV03- FEEDRATE SERV05- SYSTEM STATUS SERV10- SYSTEM DATA SETUP SERV11- DISPLAY VARIABLES SERV70- CUSTOM AUX CODES SERV78- LOOP BACK TEST SERV30- SHOW WORD SERV31- SHOW DOUBLE WORD SERV32- SHOW CRU WORD SERV33- SHOW BYTE SERV34- SHOW CRU BYTE SERV40- CURRENT TABLE SERV41- TABLE 1 DATA SERV42- TABLE 2 DATA SERV43- TABLE 3 DATA SERV44- TABLE 4 DATA SERV97- VARIABLE STORE SERV98- SYSTEM RESET SERV80- CONFIGURE SERV50- AXIS SPEEDS SERV51- SPEED CALIBRATION SERV52- MEMORY RESET SERV54- REFERENCE ADJUST
SERV00- EXIT MODE (DSPY00- EXIT MODE)

This selection is used to exit the SERVICE mode and return to normal operation. NOTE: If SERVICE or DISPLAY mode is used while a part is actually running, the EXIT MODE must be used to return to the normal operation before the cutting mode (automatic, manual, or test) can be changed.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-3
SERV01- X/Y DISPLAY (DSPY01- X/Y DISPLAY)

Displays the current X/Y axis positions. If used while a part is running, the dimensions reflect the distances from the initial start position. At other times, the readouts can be cleared and used for X/Y measuring. See the DISPLAY MODES section for further details.
SERV02- PARTS CUT (DSPY02- PARTS CUT)

When running a program, this display shows the number of part cycles performed. Multiply by the number of torches for the actual number of parts cut.
SERV03- FEEDRATE (DSPY03- FEEDRATE)

Shows the current setting of the <SPEED> key. For correct operation, this number must be within 5% of the actual machine speed. If it is significantly different, the operation becomes erratic. (See SERV54 for calibrating feedrate input.) If the digital feedrate feature is enabled (see SD62-SYSCFG2) and you select SERV03, the control first displays the current feedrate setting and then allows you to change the digitally controlled feedrate. Use the UP or DOWN scroll arrow keys to increase or decrease the feedrate at a smooth rate, or enter the desired feedrate directly on the keypad. When you press <ENTER>, the new feedrate takes effect. NOTE: If you lower the feedrate, the displayed value ramps down to the new value. Wait until the display has reached the entered feedrate value before exiting the SERV03 mode; the feedrate does not continue to ramp down if the display is canceled.
SERV05- SYS STATUS

This function gives the status of the system. If a program is running, the display shows the program number of the part being cut.
SERV10- SYS DATA (DSPY10- SYS DATA)

This function is the most important service mode. It allows you to change operating parameters and thus allows you to optimize the control operation for a particular machine. SYSTEM DATA This SERVICE / DISPLAY FUNCTION accesses a second menu of all the adjustable parameters in the system. These parameters are used to control the dynamic characteristics of the system and also to configure the 1250 to match the particular cutting machine and interface wiring. If this function is selected through the DISPLAY mode, they system parameters may be displayed but not altered. Press SERVICE> to display and alter these values.
PART-6:INSTAL-4
AO-73367
Once this mode is selected, the display changes to SD00- EXIT MODE, which is the first parameter in the list. Use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll to the desired parameter, or enter the two-digit number directly. Once the correct entry is displayed, press <ENTER>. This causes the current value for that parameter to be displayed. If the value is correct, press <ENTER> to step to the next parameter in the menu. If you need to change the value, enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and decimal point. (Use <CE> if you make a mistake.) Press <ENTER> when the value is correct. Press <ENTER> a second time to step to the next parameter in the menu. If the parameter requires you to choose between two alternatives, press <+/-> to toggle between the two choices. NOTE: Some of the parameters do not show their effect on the machines performance until you press <ENTER> the second time and the menu has been stepped to the next parameter.
SYSTEM DATA PARAMETERS: SD00- NOT USED SD01- ARC ON PURGE DELAY SD02- BLEED-OFF TIME *SD03- ACCELERATION TIME SD04- MAXIMUM DRIVE SPEED SD06- BACKUP SPEED *SD07- CORNER SPEED SD08- MINIMUM HOLD SPEED SD09- ERROR SPEED MAXIMUM *SD10- RUN SPEED LIMIT SD11- TRAVERSE SPEED LIMIT *SD14- GAIN BREAK SD15- ERROR WARNING DISTANCE *SD16- LOOP GAIN SD17- ARC OFF DELAY *SD18- SLOWDOWN DISTANCE *SD19- HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE LOOK-AHEAD SD20- X ENCODER DISTANCE/REV SD21- Y ENCODER DISTANCE/REV SD22- ENCODER LINES/REV SD23- X ENCODER DIRECTION SD24- Y ENCODER DIRECTION SD25- X DRIVE DIRECTION SD26- Y DRIVE DIRECTION
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-5
SD27- PLATE SIDE SD28- HEIGHT SENSOR RELAY *SD29- SLOWDOWN RADIUS *SD30- MINIMUM RADIUS SPEED SD31- PLASMA TABLE #1 *SD32- MIN SLW ANG *SD33- MAX SLW ANG SD40- X MARKER OFFSET SD41- Y MARKER OFFSET SD42- MARKER SPEED SD43- MARKER DELAY *SD45- DEFAULT DWELL *SD46- MINIMUM OFF DELAY SD47- X OFFSET #2 SD48- Y OFFSET #2 *SD49- START DELAY SD50- SERIAL DEFINITION SD51- PROGRAM FORMAT SD52- SPECIAL END-OF-PROGRAM SD53- FLOPPY EXTENSION SD60- OPERATING SYSTEM SD61- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SD62- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION #2 SD68- SPEED RANGE SD69- ALTERNATE LANGUAGE SELECTION SD70- KNIFE DIAMETER SD71- KNIFE BP ANGLE SD74- X OFFSET TABLE 1 TO TABLE 2 HOME POSITION SD75- Y OFFSET TABLE 1 TO TABLE 2 HOME POSITION SD76- X OFFSET TABLE 1 TO TABLE 3 HOME POSITION SD77- Y OFFSET TABLE 1 TO TABLE 3 HOME POSITION SD78- X OFFSET TABLE 1 TO TABLE 4 HOME POSITION SD79- Y OFFSET TABLE 1 TO TABLE 4 HOME POSITION SD80- X OFFSET #1 SD81- Y OFFSET #1 SD82- X OFFSET #2 SD83- Y OFFSET #2 SD84- X OFFSET #3 SD85- Y OFFSET #3 SD86- X OFFSET #4
PART-6:INSTAL-6
AO-73367
SD87- Y OFFSET #4 SD88- X OFFSET #5 SD89- Y OFFSET #5 SD90- X OFFSET #6 SD91- Y OFFSET #6 SD92- X OFFSET #7 SD93- Y OFFSET #7 SD94- X OFFSET #8 SD95- Y OFFSET #8 SD96- X OFFSET FROM TABLE 1 TO X HOME LIMIT SWITCH POSITION SD97- Y OFFSET FROM TABLE 1 TO Y HOME LIMIT SWITCH POSITION All variables marked with * are also in the overlay tables. See DETAILED MENU for further information. PARAMETER MENU Next to each parameter label is the standard unit for that value. All times are entered in seconds. Any distance or speed values are entered in the units selected by the OPERATING SYSTEM parameter (SD60). If you select an INCH system, the units are inches and inches per minutes (IPM). If you select a METRIC system, the units are millimeters and millimeters per minute (MMPM). For this reason, if you are setting up a new system, SD60- OPERATING SYSTEM and SD68- SPEED RANGE should be set first, so other values that are affected by the INCH/METRIC switch and speed are correct. SD01- ARC ON DELAY (seconds) This time value is only used when plasma cutting is selected, and delays the start of motion on a plasma cut after the ARC ON input has been received. For plasma systems with CURRENT SENSING RELAY (CSR) outputs, this value is normally set to 0.00, causing the machine to begin moving as soon as the arc transfers to the plate. For plasma systems without CSR outputs, this timer can be used to delay machine motion for approximately the same time as the purge cycle at the beginning of a plasma cut. Thus the machine holds position until the timer reaches 0 and then begins along the cut path. If a machine uses oxygen/fuel cutting only, set this parameter to 0. SD02- BLEED-OFF TIME (seconds) This time value is used with OXYGEN/FUEL CUTTING. When the cutting oxygen is turned off at the end of a cut, the machine holds position for the specified time to allow the oxygen to bleed off before moving to the next cut. If a machine uses plasma cutting only, set this parameter to 0.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-7
SD03- ACCELERATION TIME (seconds, multiple parameter) This value sets the acceleration time for the machine to go from 0 to full speed. The value should be set as low as possible to minimize the day that occurs when the machine negotiates a corner. However, it should not be set so low that an abrupt jump occurs after each corner. This value should normally be set between .2 and 1.0 seconds. SD04- MAXIMUM DRIVE SPEED (IPM/MMPM) This value must be set to the maximum drive speed of the machine at full reference. This value is used in may of the position loop gain and slowdown calculations and if not set correctly, can seriously affect machine performance. This value must be set to the capability of the drive system, not the desired maximum speed. The maximum speed value cannot exceed the speed range selected by parameter SD68- SPEED RANGE. To limit the speed, see SD10 and SD11. SD06- BACKUP SPEED (IPM/MMPM) This value sets the speed of the machine when you press <BACK UP>. This is the maximum speed when backing up. The speed can be set slower by lowering the value of the <SPEED> key. There is no acceleration/deceleration when backing up. Therefore, this speed should be set to a low enough speed that the machine can back up around a corner without excessive stress (bumping) in the gearbox or drive system. SD07- CORNER SPEED (IPM/MMPM, multiple parameter) This value, along with parameter SD18, controls the deceleration ramp used to slow down before a corner. The slope of this ramp is constant regardless of the travel speed as illustrated:
MAX SPEED (SD04)
SPEED
SPEED
CORNER SPEED (SD07)
0 DISTANCE TO CORNER SLOWDOWN DISTANCE (SD18)
PART-6:INSTAL-8
AO-73367
As can be seen from the graph, both the SLOWDOWN DISTANCE (SD18) and the CORNER SPEED affect the deceleration ramp. Both these values should be set to the minimum required to achieve acceptable corners on parts. This minimizes the time required to cut the corner, and therefore reduces the variation in the cut quality due to the change in cutting speed. Typical values are 10 IPM or 250 MMPM for CORNER SPEED, and .75 inch or 19 mm for SLOWDOWN DISTANCE. TIP: To prevent stalling in corners, do not set the CORNER SPEED to 0.00.
SD08- MINIMUM HOLD SPEED (IPM/MMPM) This speed value is used when the control is holding the machine in position. The speed entered for this parameter is used as a fixed gain value during the time the machine is within .02 inch or .5 mm of the correct position. Within this distance, the machine is moved at the MINIMUM HOLD SPEED toward the correct position. If the distance is greater than .02 inch, a normal linear proportional gain is used to move the machine back until it is again within this hold boundary. This fixed gain method actually provides a higher gain and better position hold than could be achieved with a normal proportional gain loop. The following graph illustrates position hold loop:
+SLOWNDOWN DIST
SPEED
SPEED
MIN HOLD SPEED
.02
POSITION ERROR
NOTE: At 0 error, the speed would also be o.
SD09- ERROR SPEED MAXIMUM (IPM/MMPM) This parameter is used to limit the MAXIMUM ERROR SPEED, which can be developed due to large position errors. This helps to prevent oscillation by limiting the violence of the shaking that occurs in unstable systems (with a minimum speed of 20 IPM or 500 MMPM). A good starting point for this value is to set it to one half of the maximum speed set in SD04- MAXIMUM DRIVE SPEED.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-9
SD10- RUN SPEED LIMIT (IPM/MMPM, multiple parameter) This parameter and SD11- TRAVERSE SPEED LIMIT are used to limit the speed of the machine to something less than the maximum drive capability. Normally, it is not necessary to limit the speed, since the machine was designed to work with the drive system. However, some older machines cannot travel as fast as the drive capacity without literally shaking themselves apart. In these cases, the RUN SPEED and TRAVERSE SPEED LIMITS are used. The RUN SPEED LIMIT limits the maximum speed during cutting portions of the part program. The TRAVERSE SPEED LIMIT limits the speed during noncutting traverse moves. If no limiting is required, set both the RUN SPEED LIMIT and TRAVERSE SPEED LIMIT to the same speed as SD04- MAXIMUM SPEED. SD11- TRAVERSE SPEED LIMIT (IPM/MMPM) This value acts the same as SD10- RUN SPEED LIMIT, but it limits the speed during noncutting, fast traverse moves. See description for SD10, above.
PART-6:INSTAL-10
AO-73367
SD14- GAIN BREAK (encoder counts, multiple parameter) This parameter may help to improve the cutting accuracy of a system by increasing the gain of the system for small position errors without increasing the overall gain of the system and causing oscillation. The value entered specifies a fixed gain region on either side of the correct (zero error) path where the loop gain of the system is forced. It is entered as encoder counts, not inches or millimeters. Any path error within this region causes a correction to be generated as it is already at the specified number of encoder counts. Errors outside this region are unaffected. Example: If the system loop gain is set to 2.00 IPM per count: Error in encoder counts 0 1 2 3 4* 5* Correction Speed with GAIN BRK-0 0.00 IPM 2.00 IPM 4.00 IPM 6.00 IPM 8.00 IPM 10.00 IPM Correction Speed with GAIN BRK-4 0.00 IPM 8.00 IPM 8.00 IPM 8.00 IPM 8.00 IPM 10.00 IPM
* After 4 counts, both results are the same with GAIN BREAK set to 4.00. SD15- ERROR WARNING DISTANCE (IPM/MMPM) The 1250 constantly monitors the path ERROR WARNING DISTANCE while running a part. The value entered in this parameter may be a positive or negative number. If you enter a positive value and the error exceeds the value set for this parameter, a warning message is displayed along with beeping. This indicates that the machine is not responding to positioning commands and that the part being produced is out of tolerance. If you enter a negative value and the error exceeds the value set for this parameter, a CYCLE STOP and a warning message is displayed, along with beeping. The display then flashes WARNING PATH ERROR. This indicates that the machine is not responding to positioning commands and has stopped. The value should be large enough that the normal bumps and shakes associated with a cutting machine in a production shop do not cause nuisance tripping of the warning. Its main purpose is to issue a warning when something breaks or is jammed on the machine and causes a large offset from the correct path. It should typically be set around .05 inch or 1.25 mm. SD16- LOOP GAIN (multiple parameter) This value is the most critical of all the setup parameters in affecting the machines performance while cutting a part. The position loop constantly compares the position of the machine to the correct programmed path. Any difference (path error) is multiplied by the LOOP GAIN value. This result is then output to the drives, which causes the machine to move back toward the correct path. This value should be set to as large a value as possible to give the most accurate part. If it is set too high, however, the machine becomes unstable and oscillates while moving
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-11
around the part. Too low a value causes some loss of accuracy in the part. Thus, adjusting this value is a trial and error procedure. The units for LOOP GAIN are the same as those used for any of the other speed inputs, either IPM or MMPM. The value entered, however, is the correction speed for a path error of approximately .0025 inch or .0625 mm. If the path error is more than .0025 inch or .0625 mm, the correction speed is the number of encoder counts of error multiplied by the LOOP GAIN. For example, in an INCH OPERATING SYSTEM, if the LOOP GAIN is 2.00 and the PATH ERROR is 5 encoder counts (.0125 inch), the correction speed output to the drive is (2.00 x 5) 10.0 IPM. SD17- ARC OFF DELAY (seconds) This time value is only used during plasma cutting. If the ARC ON input signal is removed from the 1250 during a plasma cut, the 1250 automatically issues a CYCLE STOP command, which halts motion. The 1250 then waits for you to press <CYCLE START> before continuing. The ARC OFF DELAY time provides a delay before the ARC OFF condition is recognized. This permits the machine to keep moving if a part falls out before the cut is completed or if a previous cut path is crossed. If this timer is not provided, the control stops as soon as the ARC ON signal is removed and does not complete the cut path. For plasma cutting, this value is typically set to 1 or 2 seconds. If only oxygen/fuel cutting is used, set this value to 0.00. SD18- SLOWDOWN DISTANCE (inch or millimeter, multiple parameter) This value sets the deceleration distance used when slowing for a corner in the part program. See the description in SD07 for an explanation of the slowdown parameters. SD19- HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE LOOK-AHEAD (inch or millimeter, multiple parameter) This distance value is only used during plasma cutting operations. It affects the operation of the PLASMA HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE relay output from the control. Normally, this relay energizes when the CORNER SLOWDOWN parameter reduces the speed of the machine before going around a corner. SD19 adds an additional condition for causing the HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE relay to energize by setting a look-ahead distance for disabling the height sensor before the end of cut, or before a PLASMA HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE auxiliary function in the part program is executed. This is especially useful when the part program contains either a lead-out, or a cross or intersection in the cutting path. Both of these conditions can cause the plasma torch to dive into the plate. By setting this distance value to some nominal value, it can prevent these problems. Keep the value as small as possible. In the case of the lead-out, by establishing a standard lead-out length (for example, .25 inches), and setting SD19 to .40 inches, it guarantees that the PLASMA HEIGHT SENSOR is disabled at least .15 inches before the lead-out started, and so it cant follow the part falling out. In the case of the cross or intersect of a previous cut, the part program must
PART-6:INSTAL-12
AO-73367
contain the appropriate HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE code (see PART PROGRAMMING section) at the point of intersection. SD19 then disables the height sensor at the specified distance, before the intersect point, and prevents the torch from diving into the plate. SD20- X ENC DIST/REV SD21- Y ENC DIST/REV SD22- ENC COUNTS/ REV The X & Y encoder distance per one revolution and the number of encoder counts per one revolution allow for various encoder/rack/pinion combinations to be used with the 1250 control. The 1250 has the ability to use a wide range of encoders. The value entered in SD20- X ENC DIST/REV is the length of travel (inch or millimeter), along the X axis per one revolution of the X axis encoder. The value entered in SD21- Y ENC DIST/REV is the length of travel (inch or millimeter) along the Y axis per one revolution of the Y axis encoder. SD22- ENC COUNTS/REV affects both the X and Y axis. The value entered is the number of quadrature encoder counts (lines) per one revolution of the encoder. The 1250 uses the distance per revolution and the counts per revolution parameters while the machine is moving to convert the encoder counts to total inches or millimeters of travel. SD23- X ENCODER DIR The quadrature encoders used for position feedback provide both direction and position information. Depending on the mounting of the X axis encoder, the direction information may or may not be correct. (This can be checked by using the SERV01X/Y DISPLAY function.) If the direction needs to be reversed, press the <+/-> key, which toggles the NORM/REV data to the opposite condition. This causes the X axis encoder to count in the correct direction. SD24- ENCODER DIR See X axis description (SD23). SD25- X DRIVE DIR This parameter is used to reverse the polarity of the X axis drive output signal. Depending on the machines drive electronics and the interface card in the 1250, the drive output signal for the X axis sometimes needs to be inverted so that the motion of the machine is correct. Use the jog keys to move the machine in the X axis and check that it moves in the correct direction. If not, press the <+/-> key to toggle the NORM/REV values. This reverses the polarity of the X drive output signal. SD26- Y DRIVE DIR This parameter is used to reverse the polarity of the Y axis drive output signal. See SD25 for a detailed description.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-13
SD27- PLATE SIDE This parameter should be set to the position of the plate being cut with respect to the operators console (left or right). This value is used by the STANDARD SHAPE routines and others to determine repeat movements and initial moves from the corner of the plate. All programs should start at the corner of the plate nearest to the operators console, since this gives the best view of the plate for aligning the torches. To change the value, press the <+/-> key to toggle the LEFT/RIGHT indication.
+X +Y -X Y
CNC
O P E R A T O R O P E R A T O R
PLATE LEFT
PLATE RIGHT
SD28- HEIGHT RELAY (NORM/REV) Some systems have one of their output relays used as a PLASMA HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE relay. This relays contacts are normally connected to the plasma systems height control. When the 1250 slows for a corner, this relay energizes, and causes the PLASMA HEIGHT SENSOR to freeze at the current height. Once the machine has re-accelerated, this relay turns off and allows the PLASMA HEIGHT SENSOR to function normally. Depending on the plasma system used, the contact must either close or open in order to perform the disable function. If this parameter is set to NORM, the output contact is normally open and closes to disable the PLASMA HEIGHT SENSOR. If set to REV, the output contact is normally closed and opens to disable the sensor. Press the <+/-> key to toggle the indicator to select the desired operation. SD29- SLOWDOWN RADIUS (inch or millimeter, multiple parameter) This parameter is used by the acceleration/deceleration routine to determine if a certain radius arc can be cut at the current machine speed or if the speed needs to be reduced due to a small radius. When an arc is cut, its radius is compared to this parameter and causes a slowdown proportional to the ratio of the two radii. This value is typically set to 2 to 3 inches, or 50 to 80 mm.
PART-6:INSTAL-14
AO-73367
SD30- MIN RAD SPD (inches or millimeters, multiple parameter) This speed value is used as the minimum cutting speed for small radii, even if the corner speed is lower. In this way, the corner speed can be adjusted to give the best deceleration to a full corner without the small radii (such as the fill-in blocks created by kerf) running at an unacceptably slow rate. Normal values are between 10 - 30 IPM. SD31- PLASMA TB1 SD31 displays a prompt for PLASMA TB1 and is answered by a YES or NO response. If you respond NO, the control uses the standard SD10 setup parameter for both oxygen/fuel and plasma cutting. If you respond YES, and the control is set for plasma cutting, the parameters in Overlay Table #1 are used to control the machine. This allows the SD10 Table #0 parameters to be set for the best oxygen/fuel cutting, and the overlay SERV41 Table #1 parameters to be set for the best plasma cutting. This allows the overlay table to be used even though the part program does not contain any specific codes. SD32- MIN SLW ANG (degrees, multiple parameters) This parameter, along with SD33- MAX SLW ANG, defines the angle range for the slowdown routine. When a part is run, the change in direction that occurs between data blocks is checked. If the direction of the programmed path changes by more than the SD33- MAX SLW ANG (maximum slowdown angle) parameter, the machine performs a full corner slowdown at the intersection of the two blocks. Similarly, if the change in direction between two data blocks is less than the number of degrees specified by SD32- MIN SLW ANG (minimum slowdown angle), the machine runs through the intersection with no slowdown at all. Changes in direction that are between the minimum and maximum values are scaled accordingly. Changes in direction that are close to the minimum value run almost at full speed and as the angle increases toward the maximum value, the machine slows down to a lower speed at the corner. The typical values for this parameter are 10 degrees for SD32, and 22 degrees for SD33. SD33- MAX SLW ANG (degrees, multiple parameter) This parameter sets the maximum boundary angle used by the corner slowdown routines. See SD32 for description. SD40- X MARKER OFFSET #1 (inches/millimeters) Parameters SD40, SD41, SD42, SD43, and SD80-95 are used when the configuration of the 1250 supports a plate marking device. When configuration does not support a plate marking device, these parameters can be ignored. Parameters SD40 and SD41 should be set to the X/Y offset distance between the cutting torch and the marking device. When a part requires marking, a MARKER OFFSET ON command is used to shift the marking device to the X/Y position where the cutting torch was previously located, allowing the marking portion of the program to be dimensioned the same as the cutting moves without having to compensate for the distance between the marker and cutting torch. When the MARKER ON command is issued, the control turns on the marking device.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-15
The control holds position for the time specified by the SD43 parameter and then begins moving along the marking path. If the SD42 parameter is set to 0.00, you can control the speed of the marker using the normal feedrate controls on the machine. If the SD43 parameter is set to a speed other than 0.00, the marker moves at that speed automatically, provided that the machines feedrate control is set higher than the SD43 marking speed. If the feedrate control is set to a lower speed, it overrides the SD43 speed and runs at the lower value. Parameters SD80 - SD95 are offsets that may be used on machines that have multiple plasma and oxygen/fuel torches on the same station. These additional offsets allow the marker on one torch to be used with another torch simply by programming the appropriate T field vale. See SD80- PROGRAMMABLE OFFSETS and the PART PROGRAMMING section for more information. SD41- Y MARKER OFFSET #1 (inches/millimeters) Marker offset dimension in the Y axis. See SD40, above. SD42- MARKING SPEED (IPM/MMPM) This parameter sets the speed to be used for the plate marking device when the marker is turned on. If this parameter is set to 0.00, you can set the marking speed manually using the normal feedrate controls on the machine. SD43- MARKER DELAY (seconds) This timer is used to delay the start of motion when the plate marking device is turned on. This delay can be used to allow the marking head to be lowered into position or it can be used to hold the machine in position for a center punching operation. SD45- DEFAULT DWELL (seconds, multiple parameter) This value sets the system default for the dwell time used when a DWELL auxiliary function code is included in a part program. This value is used unless the part program establishes a new dwell time. SD46- MIN OFF DELAY (seconds, multiple parameter) This delay time causes a dwell after any control output is turned off. It operates on all outputs (cutting oxygen, etc.) and is in addition to any specific OFF delays for a particular operation, such as the oxygen/fuel BLEED-OFF TIME. This value is typically set to 0 or 1 seconds. SD49- START DELAY (seconds, multiple parameter) This timer is used to delay motion along the cut path when any of the tools on the machine are started or one of the stations lowered. For example, when the plasma torch is enabled, this delay prevents the plasma arc from firing for the specified time, which allows the station to reach its cutting position.
PART-6:INSTAL-16
AO-73367
SD50- SERIAL DEFINITION This parameter selects the various program and communication characteristics of the serial RS-232 port. The value is a four-digit number, where each digit controls a specific function. If any digit is set to zero (0), you are prompted to make the selection when a serial operation is performed. D1 D2 D3 D4
D1 sets the communication protocol. The valid choices for D1 are taken from the following list: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 The operator is prompted for protocol RTS/CTS hardware protocol XON/XOFF software protocol Not used Not used PTAPE 1. Spooling tape reader protocol CLINK 1. CAD communication link.
See the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS section for more information. D2 selects the programming language. The valid choices for D2 are taken from the following list: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The operator is prompted for program type Standard 1250 Word Address Standard 1250 ESSI Not for normal use. Internal test only. Special Word Address #1 Special Word Address #2 Special Word Address #3 Special ESSI
See the PART PROGRAMMING section for more information. D3 selects the character format specification. The valid choices for D3 are taken from the following list: 0 1 2 3 4 5 The operator is prompted for character format NP7D: ASCII, no parity, 7 data bits NP8D: ASCII, no parity, 8 data bits EP7D: ASCII, even parity, 7 data bits EP8D: ASCII, even parity, 8 data bits OP7D: ASCII, odd parity, 7 data bits
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-17
6 7
OP8D: ASCII, odd parity, 8 data bits EIA: RS-244, odd parity format
D4 selects the baud rate. The valid choices for D4 are taken from the following list: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The operator is prompted for the baud rate 1110 baud 300 baud 600 baud 1200 baud 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud
SD51- PRGM FORMAT Each digit in this eight-digit number is used to select a particular option for the programming formats of RS-232 or paper tape loaded programs. The programming description described in the PART PROGRAMMING section only describes the standard format used the by the 1250, not all the various options. Most customers can use the standard Word Address or ESSI formats as is and do not require the special features set by this variable. In these cases, set this parameter to 00000000. Possible values for each digit are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. To enter a number, just press the value on the keypad. To enter A - F, use a two-key combination of the <SHF> key and then one of the numbers on the keypad: Press <SHF><0> to enter a value of A Press <SHF><1> to enter a value of B Press <SHF><2> to enter a value of C Press <SHF><3> to enter a value of D Press <SHF><4> to enter a value of E Press <SHF><5> to enter a value of F The following pages describe the PROGRAM FORMAT.
PART-6:INSTAL-18
AO-73367
PROGRAM FORMAT
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D1 through D3 are not used, and should be set to 0.
D4 affects all program loaded by any WADR3 or ESSI1 format. It sets the default for a decimal shift of the programmable kerf and/or programmable feedrate. The valid choices for D4 are taken from the following list: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F No decimal shift of programmed kerf or programmed feedrate values Decimal shift left set to 1 for programmed kerf values Decimal shift left set to 2 for programmed kerf value Decimal shift left set to 3 for programmed kerf value Decimal shift left set to 1 for programmed feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 1 for programmed kerf value and 1 for feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 2 for programmed kerf value and 1 for feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 3 for programmed kerf value and 1 for feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 2 for programmed feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 1 for programmed kerf value and 2 for feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 2 for programmed kerf value and 2 for feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 3 for programmed kerf value and 2 for feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 3 for programmed feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 1 for programmed kerf value and 3 for feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 2 for programmed kerf value and 3 for feedrate value Decimal shift left set to 3 for programmed kerf value and 3 for feedrate value
D5 affects all programs loaded by any WADR3 or ESSI1 format. These special formats allow various conversions to be performed on the program being loaded to comply with the standard programming. This digit allows the use of the CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTION CODE TABLE (described in SERV70 of this section) and also allows the use of an implied decimal shift.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-19
Setting the IMPLIED DECIMAL SHIFT allows the 1250 to read tapes that are programmed with an implied decimal point in the X, Y, I, and J dimensions. For example, some controls program a 2-inch dimension as X200. This would normally be interpreted as a 200 inch move. The IMPLIED DECIMAL SHIFT function allows a two-digit shift to the left to be added to the number so it is correctly loaded as 2.00 inches. Similarly, some programs are loaded in 1/10 scale. A decimal shift right of 1 causes these programs to be cut correctly. The valid choices for D5 are taken from the following list: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Neither decimal shift nor auxiliary function code table is enabled Auxiliary function code table is enabled Decimal shift left is set to 1 Decimal shift left is set to 1 and auxiliary function code table is enabled Decimal shift left is set to 2 Decimal shift left is set to 2 and auxiliary function code table is enabled Decimal shift left is set to 3 Decimal shift left is set to 3 and auxiliary function code table is enabled Decimal shift left is set to 4 Decimal shift left is set to 4 and auxiliary function code table is enabled Decimal shift right is set to 1 Decimal shift right is set to 1 and auxiliary function code table is enabled Decimal shift right is set to 2 Decimal shift right is set to 2 and auxiliary function code table is enabled Decimal shift right is set to 3 Decimal shift right is set to 3 and auxiliary function code table is enabled
D6 affects all programs loaded by any WADR3 or ESSI1 format. This digit allows the axis definitions of the incoming program to be changed to match the standard X/Y axis definitions used by the 1250. D6 also allows you to force an auxiliary code priority. In Word Address programming, it is possible to include auxiliary functions (M and G codes) in the same block as an X/Y move or an arc. The 1250 follows the RS-274 specifications, which specifies certain functions should be executed before the movement, while others are done after the movement programmed in the same block is complete. However, some other NC controls assume that all auxiliary functions are done before any movement when they are contained in the same block. So that these programs can be read without reprogramming, you can set D6 to force all auxiliary codes to operate before the movement in the same block. The valid choices for D6 are taken from the following list: 0 +X --> +X and +Y --> +Y (standard)
PART-6:INSTAL-20
AO-73367
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
+X --> +X and +Y --> -Y +X --> -X and +Y --> +Y +X --> -X and +Y --> -Y +X --> +Y and +Y --> +X +X --> -Y and +Y --> +X +X --> +Y and +Y --> -X +X --> -Y and +Y --> -X +X --> +X and +Y --> +Y and all auxiliary function codes are forced to high priority +X --> +X and +Y --> -Y and all auxiliary function codes are forced to high priority +X --> -X and +Y --> +Y and all auxiliary function codes are forced to high priority +X --> -X and +Y --> -Y and all auxiliary function codes are forced to high priority +X --> +Y and +Y --> +X and all auxiliary function codes are forced to high priority +X --> -Y and +Y --> +X and all auxiliary function codes are forced to high priority +X --> +Y and +Y --> -X and all auxiliary function codes are forced to high priority +X --> -Y and +Y --> -X and all auxiliary function codes are forced to high priority
D7 affects all programs loaded by any WADR3 or ESSI1 format when they are programmed in absolute. (Incremental programs are not affected.) For absolute programs, this digit establishes how the I and J arc coordinates are defined. Set this digit to an even number to make the I/J signs the same type as the X/Y dimensions. Therefore, on absolute programs, the I/J also must be in absolute. Set this digit to an odd number to force the I/J dimensions to be in incremental even if the program is in absolute. For incremental programs, the I/J is always incremental. D7 also selects whether or not the 1250 should use the SPECIAL END OF PROGRAM ASCII in SD52. (SD51 has a bit defined that allows the END OF PROGRAM string function to be included in WADR3, ESSI1 or both types of special programs. Setting the bit off ignores the special string and only looks for the normal end of program codes.)
SEQUENCE set
The valid choices for D7 are taken from the following list: 0 1 4 5 8
AO-73367
Default conditions Sets I/J dimensions for INCREMENTAL even if the program is in
ABSOLUTE
Special END-OF-PROGRAM on WADR3 loads only enabled Special END-OF-PROGRAM on WADR3 loads only enabled and I/J dimensions for INCREMENTAL Special END-OF-PROGRAM on ESSI1 loads only enabled
PART-6:INSTAL-21
9 C D
Special END-OF-PROGRAM on ESSI1 loads only enabled and I/J dimensions for INCREMENTAL Special END-OF-PROGRAM on WADR3 & ESSI1 loads enabled Special END-OF-PROGRAM on WADR3 & ESSI1 loads enabled and I/J dimensions for INCREMENTAL
D8 affects all programs loaded by any WADR or ESSI format, and sets the default for program dimensions as either absolute or incremental. This causes any program that does not have a code declaring it as either absolute or incremental to be assumed as the type set by this digit. Programs that contain the correct auxiliary code for absolute or incremental are loaded according to that code regardless of this digit. The valid choices for D8 are taken from the following list: 0 1 Incremental dimensions used as default Absolute dimensions used as default
SD52- SPECIAL END OF PROGRAM This parameter allows up to four characters to be entered (in ASCII as 8 digits), which specify a four-character string that can act as the end of a Word Address or ESSI program. This feature aids in reading tapes from other controls that do not provide a normal auxiliary function (M, G, or ESSI code) at the end of a program. For example, some controls use a % sign as the end-of-program. If the % is the end of program code, the ASCII value of the % is 25. The END OF PROGRAM value would be equal to EOP25000000. If the END OF PROGRAM code is END, then EOP- 454E4400 because in ASCII: E= N= D= 45 4E 44
PART-6:INSTAL-22
AO-73367
ASCII CODES Character NULL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US SP ! # $ % & ( ) * Hex 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 (XON) 12 (RON) 13 (XOFF) 14 (ROFF) 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A Character + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < > ? @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U Hex 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 Character V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ DEL Hex 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-23
SD53- FILE EXTEN This parameter gives the 1250 the ability to add a fixed file extension of any type to part programs. Files that are tagged with CNC, TXT, or any other valid file extension can be loaded from the 1250 disk drive or serial port. Programs that are stored to the 1250 disk drive or out the serial port have this file extension added to the program number. This parameter allows up to four characters to be entered (in ASCII as 8 digits), which can act as the file extension. For example, if the desired file extension of all files that are to be loaded from the floppy and stored to the floppy is .CNC, then SD53- FILE EXTEN434E4300, because in ASCII: C= N= C= 4E 4E 43
The 1250 adds the . (period) automatically. If the desired file extension of all files that are to be loaded from the floppy and stored to the floppy is .TXT, then SD53- FILE EXTEN- 54585400, because in ASCII: T= X= T= 54 58 54
and the 1250 add the . (period) automatically. See the ASCII Code Table in this section for a list of characters and their ASCII values. NOTE: Although four characters may be entered, the MS-DOS operating system only allows a three-character extension. Other operating systems allow more than three characters. SD60- OPERATING SYS This parameter selects between an INCH based operating system and a METRIC based operating system. Press <+/-> to toggle the selection. If an INCH operating system is selected:

All dimensions and distances for DISPLAYS and entered values are in inches. All SPEED DISPLAYS and entries are in inches per minute (IPM). All STANDARD SHAPE programs prompt for inch part dimensions.
If a METRIC operating system is selected:

All dimensions and distances for DISPLAYS and entered data are in millimeters. All SPEED DISPLAYS and entered values are in millimeters per minute (MMPM). All STANDARD SHAPE programs prompt for millimeter part dimensions.
PART-6:INSTAL-24
AO-73367
CAUTION: Although the 1250 switches from inches to millimeters, changing from one to another does not convert the dimensions in the program. The 1250 setup parameters, as well as programs stored in the control, are not re-adjusted to inches or millimeters. SD61- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION #1 This parameter is used to select the desired system operation for the machine it is being installed on. Set SD61 to 22 for proper operation. SD62- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION #2 This secondary system configuration flag is used to selected the desired system operation for the machine it is being installed on. D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
D1 is currently unused and should be set to 0.
D2 selects PROGRAMMABLE FEEDRATE, DIGITAL FEEDRATE, PROGRAMMABLE KERF, and HOME LIMIT SWITCH ENABLE. The valid choices for D2 are taken from the following list: 0 2 4 6 8 A C E No DIGITAL FEEDRATE or PROGRAMMABLE FEEDRATE
HOME LIMIT SWITCHES DIGITAL FEEDRATE DIGITAL FEEDRATE
enabled
and HOME LIMIT SWITCHES enabled (feature must also be enabled) and HOME LIMIT SWITCHES and HOME LIMIT SWITCHES
PROGRAMMABLE FEEDRATE PROGRAMMABLE FEEDRATE DIGITAL FEEDRATE
and PROGRAMMABLE FEEDRATE
PROGRAMMABLE KERF, FEEDRATE
D3 manipulates the default condition for the X & Y home index switches and the X & Y home index inputs from the encoders. This digit can also be used to bypass a particular input by setting the invert bit so that the input is detected as being on when there is no device actually plugged in. This is useful where a machine has only home switches but no home index inputs from the encoders. SD96 (X offset from table 1 to X limit switch) and SD97 (Y offset from table 1 to Y home limit switch) are used to establish the (0,0) position of the machine at a fixed offset from the home switch/index locations. This allows the switches to be located anywhere in the machines travel, but allow the (0,0) position to be established at a logical point for the actual cutting process.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-25
The valid choices for D3 are taken from the following list: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Default Y index input inverted X index input inverted X & Y index input inverted Y home switch input inverted Y home switch input inverted and Y index input inverted Y home switch input inverted and X index input inverted Y home switch input inverted and X & Y index input inverted X home switch input inverted X home switch input inverted and Y index input inverted X home switch input inverted and X index input inverted X home switch input inverted and X & Y index input inverted X & Y home switch input inverted X & Y home switch input inverted and Y index input inverted X & Y home switch input inverted and X index input inverted X & Y home switch input inverted and X & Y index input inverted
D4 sets the search direction for the machine once the operator has selected the FNC16SET HOME function. The valid choices for D4 are taken from the following list: 0 4 8 C Search begins in +Y and then in +X direction Y home search direction begins in the -Y direction X home search direction begins in the -X direction X & Y search begin in the -X & -Y direction
D5 is undefined and should be set to 0.
D6 is used to re-configure the jog directions to match the machine axis and disable the latched jog function. The valid choices for D6 are taken from the following list: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 +X --> +X and +Y --> +Y (standard) +X --> +X and +Y --> -Y +X --> -X and +Y --> +Y +X --> -X and +Y --> -Y +X --> +Y and +Y --> +X +X --> -Y and +Y --> +X +X --> +Y and +Y --> -X +X --> -Y and +Y --> -X
PART-6:INSTAL-26
AO-73367
8 9 A B C D E F
Disable the latched jog function +X --> +X and +Y --> -Y & disable latched jog function +X --> -X and +Y --> +Y & disable latched jog function +X --> -X and +Y --> -Y & disable latched jog function +X --> +Y and +Y --> +X & disable latched jog function +X --> -Y and +Y --> +X & disable latched jog function +X --> +Y and +Y --> -X & disable latched jog function +X --> -Y and +Y --> -X & disable latched jog function
D7 selects which set of jog keys are used in the SERIES 1000 Tracer / NC controls. The valid choices for D7 are as follows: 0 1 Jog from NC keypad in NC RUN Jog from NC keypad in SERIES 1000 keypads in NC RUN
D8 affects the acceleration time of the 1250, by setting values for SPEED-DEPENDENT ACCELERATION, TEACHABLE PREHEAT TIME, and pierce hold times. For example, if SD03 (acceleration time) is set to 1.5 seconds, SD04 (maximum drive speed) is set to 150 IPM, cut speed is set to 150, and SPEED-DEPENDENT ACCELERATION is set to 1 in D8, the machine accelerates to 150 IPM in 1.5 seconds. When the cut speed is reduced to 75 IPM, the machine accelerates to cutting speed in .75 seconds. If you set SPEED-DEPENDENT ACCELERATION to 0 in D8, this provides acceleration to cut speed based solely on the value of SD03 (acceleration time). Also, the 1250 has the ability to learn a preheat time, when set in D8. Use the <CYCLE START> key to extend or shorten the preheat time. The new time is remembered and used on all subsequent pierces. The valid choices for D8 are taken from the following list: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A Normal time based acceleration Speed-dependent acceleration; no teachable preheat time Teachable preheat time; normal time dependent acceleration Teachable preheat time; speed-dependent acceleration Plasma pierce hod time enable Plasma pierce hold time enable; speed-dependent acceleration Plasma pierce hold time enable; teachable preheat time Plasma pierce hold time enable; teachable preheat time; speed-dependent acceleration Oxygen/fuel pierce hold time enable Oxygen/fuel pierce hold time enable; speed-dependent acceleration Oxygen/fuel pierce hold time enable; teachable preheat time
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-27
B C D E F
Oxygen fuel pierce hold time enable; teachable preheat time; speeddependent acceleration Oxygen/plasma pierce hold time enable Oxygen/plasma pierce hold time enable; speed-dependent acceleration Oxygen/plasma pierce hold time enable; teachable preheat time Oxygen/plasma pierce hold time enable; teachable preheat time; speeddependent acceleration
SD68- SPEED RANGE (inches or millimeters) This parameter allows the range of speed displays to be shifted to match the requirements for different types of machines. For example, water jet machines usually run very slowly, so the range can be shifted down to allow for better resolution. High speed plasma, glass cutters, and other applications may require speeds above the 1310 IPM value (with a reduced resolution). NOTE: This parameter, like SD60 (inch or metric operating system), must be set before any other parameters are entered. Set SD 68 to 4 to select the normal range. The following selections are available: SD68 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Maximum Speed IPM 81.9175 163.835 327.67 655.34 1310.68 2621.36 5242.76 10485.44 Maximum Speed MMPM 2047 4095 8191 16383 32767 65535 131068 262136 Resolution IPM .0025 .005 .01 .02 .04 .08 .16 .32 Resoluti on MMPM .0625 .125 .25 .5 1 2 4 8
The normal setting is 4. SD69- LANGUAGE SEL. This parameter allows one alternate language to be selected. The language feature must first be enabled and EPROM #3 must be replaced with an EPROM having the appropriate language.
PART-6:INSTAL-28
AO-73367
The valid choices for SD69 are taken from the following list: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 English German French Finnish Italian Spanish Swedish Dutch Portuguese
SD70- KNIFE DIA. (inches or millimeters) This parameter is for the special swivel knife compensation routine, which modifies the cut path to produce sharp corners rather than the radiused corners caused by the knife offset. If this feature is installed in the control, this parameter should be set to twice the offset distance from the center of rotation to the knife point. This is the same as the diameter of the circle that would result if the knife was rotated 360 degrees. SD71- KNIFE BP ANGLE (degrees) This parameter is also used with the special knife compensation option. It sets the minimum change in direction that causes the special knife processing to take effect. For small changes in direction, the path is unaffected. If a sharp corner (greater than this parameter value) is found, however, the path is modified so that a sharp corner is actually cut. SD80 - SD95 PROGRAMMABLE OFFSETS (inches or millimeters)
PROGRAMMABLE OFFSETS can be used with multiple plasma and/or oxygen/fuel torches that may or may not have multiple markers mounted on the same station. These additional offsets allow the marker on one torch to be used with another torch simply by programming the appropriate T field value.
In 1250 Word Address programming language, programmable offset values are defined using a T field in a program block with an M71 (MARKER OFFSET ON) function code. In 1250 ESSI programming language, programmable offset values are defined using a + field with an 11 (MARKER OFFSET ON) function code. For example, in Word Address programming format M71 T4 and in ESSI programming format 11+4 both define MARKER #1 OFFSET ON, and then uses the values in SD86 (XOFST4) and SD87 (YOFST4) for the offset move.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-29
NOTE:
The 1250 sets the following parameters equal to each other:
SD40 X MARKER OFFSET and SD80 X OFFSET #1 SD41 Y MARKER OFFSET and SD81 Y OFFSET #1 SD47 X MARKER OFFSET and SD82 X OFFSET #2 SD48 Y MARKER OFFSET and SD83 Y OFFSET #2 See SD40 for additional information on markers and marker offsets. The PROGRAMMABLE OFFSETS are as follows: T Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Offsets Used SD80 XOFST1 SD81 YOFST1 SD82 XOFST2 SD83 YOFST2 SD84 XOFST3 SD85 YOFST3 SD86 XOFST4 SD87 YOFST4 SD88 XOFST5 SD89 YOFST5 SD90 XOFST6 SD91 YOFST6 SD92 XOFST7 SD93 YOFST7 SD94 XOFST8 SD95 YOFST8
SD96- HOME INDEX SWITCH (inches or millimeters) This parameter is the distance from the X HOME INDEX SWITCH to cutting table #1 home position in the X axis. SD97- Y HOME INDEX SWITCH (inches or millimeters) This parameter is the distance from the Y HOME INDEX SWITCH to cutting table #1 home position in the Y axis.
PART-6:INSTAL-30
AO-73367
MULTIPLE SETUP PARAMETER TABLES Due to the different types of cutting tools that may be included on the same machine (router, water jet, plasma, etc.), the setup parameters need to be set differently for each type of tool. The 1250 has the ability to do this and get optimum performance out of the tool being run. has four additional overly tables that are selectable by a G code followed by a T code with a select number in the part program (Word Address). Each table can be set up to provide optimum performance for a particular tool and then called by the program before the cutting begins. The overlay tables do not contain the entire list of setup variables since many of them are common for all cutting tools (encoder directions, maximum drive speed, etc.). The parameters that are contained in the overlay tables are: SD03- ACCELERATION TIME SD07- CORNER SPEED SD10- RUN SPEED LIMIT SD14- GAIN BREAK SD16- LOOP GAIN SD18- SLOWDOWN DISTANCE SD19- HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE SD29- SLOWDOWN RADIUS SD30- MIN RAD SPD SD32- MIN SLW ANG SD33- MAX SLW ANG SD45- DEFAULT DWELL TIME SD46- MINIMUM OFF TIME SD49- START DELAY TIME When a part program is running, the parameters from the selected table are copied into a running parameter area that is used to run the part program. When a part program is started, the system defaults to Table #0, which is set up by the normal SERV10 procedure. If no table select codes are contained in the part program, the system runs using the SERV10 parameters. To switch to a different table, the program must contain one of the following data blocks as a separate line in the program. G46 T1 G46 T2 G46 T3 G46 T4 G46 T0 (Selects overlay table #1) (Selects overlay table #2) (Selects overlay table #3) (Selects overlay table #4) (Selects standard SERV10 table)
SERVICE MODE 10, SYSTEM DATA TABLE,
NOTE: G46 can be swapped to any other M or G code desired by using CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTION CODE CONVERSION feature available with WADR3. The number following the T word must be an integer (0 - 4) or it defaults to the standard Table #0. The part program can contain any number of table select functions. This allows customizing one table for high speed cutting on large data blocks and another for intricate portions of the program. Also, including the RUN SPEED LIMIT parameter allows the maximum cutting speed of the part to be limited so that it does not exceed the
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-31
capacity of the tool. (This helps to prevent router bit breaks by limiting the feedrate to a safe range.) The TRAVERSE SPEED LIMIT is not table-selectable, since there is no cutting process running during traverse moves. The setup procedure for the tables is similar to the standard SERV10 procedure.
SERV10 sets up the non-overlaid parameters and the Table #0 entries of the overlaid ones. When these parameters are entered, the display shows SDxxnnnnnnnn. For example, SD03- ACCEL TIME SERV41 sets up overlay Table #1 parameters. The entry procedures are the same, however, the readout displays 1-xx- nnnnnnnn to show that Table #1 is being accessed. For example, 1-03- ACCEL TIME SERV42 sets up overlay Table #2 parameters. The entry procedures are the same, however, the readout displays 2-xx- nnnnnnnn to show that Table #2 is being accessed. For example, 2-03- ACCEL TIME SERV43 sets up overlay Table #3 parameters. The entry procedures are the same, however, the readout displays 3-xx- nnnnnnnn to show that Table #3 is being accessed. For example, 3-03- ACCEL TIME SERV44 sets up overlay Table #4 parameters. The entry procedures are the same, however, the readout displays 4-xx- nnnnnnnn to show that Table #4 is being accessed. For example, 4-03- ACCEL TIME When SERV40 is first selected, the control displays CURRENT TABLE- X where X is a digit 0 - 4. This is the index of the table that is currently running the machine. To adjust the parameters in this table, press <ENTER>. That table is accessed, and you may change the parameters. To force the selection of a particular table for testing, enter a new index number (0 - 4) when the CURRENT TABLE display is showing. The new table is copied into the running table area and immediately affects the operation of the machine. Then press <ENTER> to access and adjust the new table.
Parameters that are not in the overlay tables can only be accessed and adjusted by using the SERV10 procedure. Note that if SERV40 is used to access Table #0, only the overlaid parameters are displayed so that Table #0 appears the same as 1 - 4. Accessing Table #0 through SERV10 allows all the parameters to be accessed. Due to the additional memory required to store the multiple setup tables, there is not sufficient RAM available to keep all the parameters available for access at any time. Therefore, when the machine is not running, the RAM used to store the multiple tables is re-used for other system purposes. The promoters are recalled from non-volatile memory back to the operating RAM when a part is selected for running. The parameters are also recalled to operating RAM when you press <RECYCLE>. Therefore, the parameters can only be entered or displayed either in the RECYCLE state, or after a part has been selected for running and the kerf, acceleration, deceleration, and part rotation is complete. The parameters can be adjusted all the time a part is running regardless of whether the machine is moving or stopped.
PART-6:INSTAL-32
AO-73367
NOTE: If you adjust the parameters, but the new values are not stored using the SERV97 procedure before you press <RECYCLE>, the new values are replaced by the previously stored data that is recalled from non-volatile memory. Similarly, if you adjust the parameters in the RECYCLE state, and then a part is selected for running without storing the values first, they are also returned to their previous values.
SERV11- DSPY VAR

This function is an important tool in checking the controls various operating and diagnostic displays. It displays many of the values used in the position loop calculations. It also shows various hardware locations, which reduces the need for external test equipment when looking for a problem. SYSTEM VARIABLE DISPLAY The SYSTEM VARIABLE DISPLAY function allows many internal data values to be displayed for troubleshooting and diagnostic purposes. When you select SERV11 or DSPY11, a second menu is presented. Select the desired display from that menu, either by scrolling or entering the specific display number. Once the mode is selected, the display changes to V01-X DRIVE, which is the first variable in the list. Select the desired variable by scrolling or by directly entering the two-digit number of the particular variable. Once the correct one is displayed, press <ENTER>. This causes the current value for that variable to be displayed. V01- X DRIVE Displays the X drive output from the position loop as a percentage from 0 to 100%. When you control machine speed with the <SPEED> key, a 100% reading indicates that the position loop is commanding 100% of the <SPEED> key setting. If a traverse move is being performed, the 100% value indicates 100% of the maximum speed of the machine as entered for SD04. This display is useful when the machine is not running at the correct speed. If the feedrate shown for SERV03- FEEDRATE is correct, and this display shows that the position loop is commanding 100% of the current feedrate, it indicates the machine should be running at the feedrate speed. If it is running slower, it indicates a mechanical or electrical problem, usually outside of the 1250. V02- XDAOUT This display shows the actual bit value being sent to the X axis D/A converter. Since a ten-bit converter is used in the 1250, a displayed value of 03FF indicates the full 100% bit value is being sent to the converter. A negative output has an 8 in the first digit (83FF). The D/A bit value is determined by multiplying the X drive value (V01) by the speed calibration factor for the X axis.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-33
V03- X ABS. (inches or millimeters) This function shows the same data as SERV01: the current X position value. It is displayed with four decimal places (.0000) for inch systems and 3 decimal places (.000) for metric systems. V04- X ENC. This function shows the current X position value as actual input encoder counts. The equation used to calculate the X position based on incoming encoder counts and the X encoder scaling value (SD20) is: INPUT ENCODER COUNTS (V04) ENCODER DIST/REV (SD20) X 4 X ENCODER LINE/REV (SD22) = ABSOLUTE POSITION (V03)
V05- X ERROR (inches or millimeters) When the 1250 is doing a line program block, this display shows the X distance from the correct path. If inaccurate parts are being cut, use displays V05, V15, and V20 to prove whether the problem is mechanical or is due to the 1250 position loop. While a part is being cut (or test run), check the X ERROR and Y ERROR (V15) at various points along the part while a line is being cut and V20 during arcs. If the error is very small or 0, it indicates that the 1250 is functioning correctly, and that the problem is mechanical. This could be caused by a loose encoder bracket or torch holder, or backlash in the drive system. If the display shows a large error, it indicates that the 1250 knows that the path is incorrect, but is unable to correct for it. This can still be caused by a mechanical problem, but is usually due to an electrical problem with either the drive system electronics or the 1250 interface card. Another possible reason for large errors while cutting a part is that the LOOP GAIN (SD16) is set too low, which prevents the error from being corrected. V06- XERSCL This displays the speed percentage being commanded after the path error has been scaled by the LOOP GAIN. This display works for either lines or arcs. For example, assume a part is being cut, and the <SPEED> key is set to 20.00 IPM. The maximum speed at that point would be 20 IPM, which would be 100% speed. If this display showed 25%, it indicates that a speed of 5 IPM (25% of 20 IPM) is being commanded due to the error in the X axis. V07- X HOME This displays the distance from the HOME ALIGNMENT REFERENCE POSITION in the X axis.
PART-6:INSTAL-34
AO-73367
V11- Y DRIVE See V01 (X DRIVE) for description. V12- YDAOUT See V02 (XDAOUT) for description. V13- Y ABS See V03 (X ABS) for description. V14- Y ENC See V04 (X ENC) for description. V15- YERROR See V05 (XERROR) for description. V16- YERSCL See V06 (XERSCL) for description. V17- Y HOME Displays the distance from the HOME ALIGNMENT REFERENCE POSITION in the Y axis. V20- RADERR (inches or millimeters) While an arc program block is being run, this shows the path error from the correct arc radius. A positive value indicates that the machine is outside the correct radius. Negative values indicate that the error is inside the correct radius. This value can be used in the same ways as the X ERROR and Y ERROR displays described in V05 to determine the cause if a part is inaccurate. This display shows the path error while running an arc data block. See V05 for details on possible causes. V21- RADSCL This value also pertains to running arc blocks and shows the commanded speed percentage after the LOOP GAIN has scaled any radius error (as displayed in V20). See V06 for a description of this type of display. Once this value is calculated, it is divided between the XERSCL (V06) and YERSCL (V16) values, depending on the position of the machine along the arc. VARIABLES 22-49 These variables are for testing purposes only, and are not needed during normal installation and servicing. V22- ENDDST End-point distance
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-35
V23- ARCBND V30- ACCSCL V40- PRETIME V41- ARCTIME V42- BLETME V43- MRKTME V50- BP INPUT
Arc end-point boundary distance Acceleration/deceleration scale value Displays preheat timer Displays ARC ON delay timer Displays BLEED-OFF timer Displays MARKER ON delay timer
This display shows the current state of the eight signal inputs from the interface card and main card. The data are displayed as an eight-bit binary value. 1 means that the input is on, and 0 means that the input is off. BP INPT = 00000000: 0 1 for cut/tool on sense 1 for E-STOP 0 X Home Index / switch input 1 for E-STOP 0 Y Home Index / switch input 1 for E-STOP 0 Not used 0 1 for Plasma select 0 Non-vol data bit 0 J5 0 J4
V54- XCNTR Shows the eight-bit hexadecimal value of X axis encoder counter. Can be used to check encoder input circuitry by making sure counter counts smoothly when encoder is being turned. V55- YCNTR Show the eight-bit hexadecimal value of Y axis encoder. (See V54). V60- BP OUT Shows an eight-digit binary display of drive control output and relay control bits being sent to the interface card circuitry. 1 means that the output is on, and 0 means that the output is off. Each digit controls a different function: X 1 for low speed range, 0 for normal speed X 1 for internal ref, 0 for speed key X Y D/A sign bit X X D/A sign bit 0 1 for cut off 0 1 for marker on 0 1 for preheat 0 1 for cut start
Height sense disable
PART-6:INSTAL-36
AO-73367
MEMORY DISPLAY UTILITIES

The 1250 has five display utilities that display any memory or CRU location in the system in a variety of display formats. The CRU address space is a single bit processing utility that provides 32k bit locations in addition to the normal 64k address space of the microprocessor. The five display utilities are: SERV30 / DSPY30 SERV31 / DSPY31 SERV32 / DSPY32 SERV33 / DSPY33 SERV34 / DSPY34 Single word memory display Double word memory display 16 bit CRU display Single byte memory display 8 bit CRU display
Once the selection is made for any of these DISPLAYS, the display changes to the display format selected. See the individual descriptions of the display formats. Regardless of which is selected, the address of the data is displayed on the left of the readout as a four-digit hexadecimal number, while the data are displayed on the right of the display. The memory address is flashing, which indicates that the address value can be changed by entering the desire value. Once the correct address is entered, the data at that address are automatically displayed. To alter the data at that address, press <ENTER>. This stops the address flashing and starts flashing the data value. Any value entered on the keypad changes the data field. Once the new data value is entered, press <ENTER>. This places the data value back at the address location. The data field continues to flash and the value can be changed again. Once the flashing value is correct, press <ENTER> again to return to the address entry mode (address flashing). To enter either the address or data value, use the numeric keypad. Use <CE> if you need to correct any mistakes during entry. If you enter a hexadecimal value, use 0 through 9 and A through F. To enter a number, just press the value on the keypad. To enter A through F, use a two-key combination of <SHF> and one of the numbers on the keypad: Press <SHF> <0> to enter a value of A Press <SHF> <1> to enter a value of B Press <SHF> <2> to enter a value of C Press <SHF> <3> to enter a value of D Press <SHF> <4> to enter a value of E Press <SHF> <5> to enter a value of F
SERV30- SHOW WORD

This shows a single word, a 16-bit hexadecimal display or entry of any memory location in the system. The display for the SERV30 / DSPY30 utility appears as follows:
AO-73367 PART-6:INSTAL-37
MW@XXXX-AA HHHH The address of the data is displayed on the left of the readout (indicated by XXXX). The address may be changed when it is flashing by entering the desired value on the keypad. The data at the displayed address (indicated by AA) are interpreted as ASCII data. The data at the displayed address is shown on the right of the readout (indicated by HHHH) is a four-digit hexadecimal value. To enter a new data value (only possible if entered through SERV30), first press <ENTER>. This causes the address value to stop flashing and the data value to start flashing. Now, any value entered on the keypad alters the data value. Press <ENTER> when the value is correct. This places the new data at the indicated address. The data field continues to flash, so the data value can be changed again and again. To return to the address selection mode, press <ENTER> again. The data value stops flashing and the address value starts flashing, indicating that a new address may be entered.
SERV31- SHOW DBLE

This is a double word, a 32-bit hexadecimal display / entry of any memory location in the system. The display for the SERV31 / DSPY31- SHOW DBL utility is as follows: MD@XXXX-HHHHHHHH The address of the two-word data is shown on the left side of the readout as a four-digit hexadecimal value. The data are shown are the right of the readout as an eight-digit hexadecimal value.
SERV32- SHOW CRUW

This is a 16-bit hexadecimal display / entry of any CRU location in the processors CRU address space. The display for the SERV32 / DSPY32- SHOW CRUW utility is shown as follows: CW@XXXX- HHHH The address of the least significant bit of the 16-bit CRU value is shown on the left. The 16-bit CRU value is shown as a four-digit hexadecimal value on the right of the readout.
SERV33- SHOW BYTE

This is a single byte, eight-bit hexadecimal display / entry of any memory location in the system. The display for the SERV33 / DSPY33- SHOW BYTE utility is shown as follows:
PART-6:INSTAL-38
AO-73367
MB@XXXX-BBBBBBBB The address of the memory byte is shown on the left of the readout. The data byte at the address is shown on the right of the readout in an eight-bit binary format.
SERV34- SHOW CRUB

This is an eight-bit hexadecimal display / entry of any CRU address in the processors CRU address. The display for the SERV34 / DSPY34- SHOW CRUB utility is shown as follows: CB@XXXX-BBBBBBBB The address of the least significant bit of the eight-bit CRU value is shown on the left of the readout as a four-digit hexadecimal number. The eight CRU data bits are shown in binary format on the right of the readout. (Read most significant bit to least significant bit.)
SERV50 - AXIS SPEED

This function can only be accessed through the SERVICE menu. When selected, the display continuously shows the X/Y axis speeds. This display is particularly useful in adjusting the machine servo drives. When this SERVICE MODE is selected, the display shows the X and Y axis speeds (IPM or MMPM) on the readout. These displays are much easier to use for checking the X and Y speeds than using a stopwatch or tachometer.
SERV51- SPD CAL

This function can only be accessed through the SERVICE mode. It performs an automatic speed calibration routine that matches the outputs from the 1250 to the servo drives. This helps counteract any non-linear characteristics of the drives and leads to a more consistent cutting speed regardless of the direction of travel. Once the machine servos have been adjusted so that they run at the same speed in all directions, this function is used to balance the servo outputs of the 1250. After you have selected SERV51 and have pressed <ENTER>, the display sequences through the following prompts: SWITCH TO --HIGH SPEED RANGE-THEN CYCLE START RANGE 0-XXXXX The XXXXX digits show the maximum speed of the machine. Press <CYCLE START> to start the calibration process.
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-39
The patented AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION ROUTINE runs a square shape and monitors the speed on each of the sides of the square. Each time the square is completed, the calibration factor for each side is adjusted to try to balance the speeds. Another square is run to check the results of the new calibration values. This process continues until the four directions are balanced, or for a maximum of 10 times around the square. While the calibration is being done, the display shows the X and Y speeds. Once all four directions are balanced, the machine stops and displays the following: SWITCH TO --NEXT LOWER RANGE-THEN CYCLE START RANGE 0-XXXXX The 1250 does not have any range switch; therefore, just press <CYCLE START>. The display changes to: CALIBRATION DONE At this point, the calibration values are stored in the operating memory of the system. However, they have not been transferred to the non-volatile parameter storage memory yet. Thus, if power is lost before they are transferred, the previous calibration values would be returned. See SERV97- VAR. STORE for details on permanently storing the values.
SERV52- MEM RESET

This function can only be accessed through the SERVICE mode. It causes the program memory to be erased and re-initialized. It is used when software is updated and requires re-structuring of the program storage memory, and erases the existing programs as well as the CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTION CODE table. When SERV52- MEM RESET is selected, it displays YES+ RESET -NO. To reset the memory for the new card, press <+/-> to toggle to YES in the readout (which will flash). Then press <ENTER>. To abort the procedure without altering the memory, press <+/-> to toggle to NO (which will flash) and then press <ENTER>. If you select YES, a second prompt is issued to make sure that you are aware that the procedure erases any existing programs (NO YOU SURE YES). Again, to reset the memory, press <+/-> to toggle to YES (which will flash). Then press <ENTER>. To abort the procedure without altering the memory, press <+/-> to toggle to NO (which will flash) and then press <ENTER>.
SERV54- REF ADJUST

This function is accessed through the SERVICE mode only, and calibrates the A/D input circuitry to avoid a manual pot adjustment. The calibration value is stored in nonvolatile memory along with the other system parameters. This procedure is used to adjust the input circuitry that converts the voltage from the speed reference into the numerical value used by the 1250. This procedure only needs to be done when the system is installed, or when service work to the system that might alter
PART-6:INSTAL-40
AO-73367
the speed reference voltage has occurred. The voltage from the speed reference is converted into a digital value that displays FEEDRATE- XXXX when DSPY03 is selected. When the speed reference is set for maximum speed, the value displayed on the readout should equal the number entered for SD04- MAX SPEED. If the displayed value is too low, or if the feedrate must be reduced before the numbers start dropping, this procedure should be done. To perform the AUTOMATIC REFERENCE adjustment: 1. Adjust the feedrate to full speed. 2. Press <ENTER>. The readout temporarily displays the data and calibration values, and then changes to the normal FEEDRATE-XXX.XX. At this point, the value displayed on the readout should be the same as the value entered for the maximum drive speed entered in SD04- MAX SPD. This value, like all the setup values, is not permanent until you perform the SERV97- VAR STORE procedure. See VARIABLE STORE for further details.
SERV70- CUSTOM AUX

This SERVICE function is used to set up the data tables for auxiliary function code translation. These tables are used when programs are loaded using either WADR3 or ESSI1 program formats to translate the auxiliary function codes from the input values to the standards used by the 1250. The 1250 includes several features that allow you to alter the format of the programs loaded into the system so they match the programming standards of the system. These programs must be loaded through the RS-232 port. They may be programmed in either ESSI or Word Address. Once example of the conversion utilities of the 1250 is absolute or incremental programming (see SD51-PRGM FORMAT), which allows programming in either incremental or absolute dimensions with selectable definition of arc I and J dimensions. Another example of the conversion utilities of the 1250 is AXIS REVERSAL AND EXCHANGE (see SD51-PRGM FORMAT), which allows definition of the X and Y axis to be reversed and permits +/- sign definitions for each axis to be configured to match the incoming program. Along with these features, the CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTION CODE table allows the auxiliary codes within a part program to be converted to the standard function codes used by the 1250. For example, most systems use G02 for a clockwise arc and a G03 for counter-clockwise. However, if the programming standard used for other machines at your site happens to use a G27 and G33 or even a pair of M codes, they can be reassigned by the CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTION CODE CONVERSION feature, so that the correct clockwise and counter-clockwise arcs are cut. This feature also allows ESSI auxiliary function codes to be re-assigned in the same way. The CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTION CODE CONVERSION feature only works if programs are loaded using WADR3 or ESSI1 special program formats. The standard programming instructions in the PART PROGRAMMING section of this manual do not mention these formats since they are not required by the majority of the users. The special conversions and axis definitions as described in SD51- PRGM FORMAT and the auxiliary function
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-41
code conversions do not affect programs if they are loaded using any of the other programming formats (WADR, WADR1, WADR2, or ESSI). This allows standard programming to be less confusing and simpler. To use the CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTION CODE CONVERSION feature, first set the left most digit of SD51- PRGM FORMAT to 1. If it is 0, the standard WADR or ESSI program formats for the 1250 are used regardless of the setting of this table. After SD51- PRGM FORMAT digits are properly set, the conversion table must be loaded for the necessary code changes. The table works by checking each incoming Word Address M or G code, and all ESSI auxiliary functions. It scans through the table to see if the specific code is listed in the conversion table. If it is not, the code remains unchanged and is loaded normally. If the table contains a conversion definition for the particular auxiliary code, however, the input code is replaced with the new value from the table. It is then processed and stored in memory. The table may contain up to 50 conversions, made up of any combination of Word Address M and G codes or ESSI function codes. Each entry in the table contains information that defines which type of input it is looking for and what the conversion should be. To access the table for display and possible modification of the conversion values, select SERV70- CUSTOM AUX. After you press <ENTER>, memory is checked to see if the auxiliary function code table has been initialized. If so, the prompting continues by displaying the first table location AUX01-. Since the AUXILIARY FUNCTION CODE CONVERSION table is stored in the battery-backed program memory, room for the table data must be allocated in memory. This is performed automatically when the SERV52- MEMORY RESET function is done. If the 1250 has been updated, however, it is possible that the room for this table is not available in memory. If this occurs, an error message (AUX TABLE ERROR) is displayed, which indicates that the table is not present in memory. To correct the error and allow the table to be loaded, perform SERV52- MEMORY RESET. Once the memory is cleared, select SERV70- CUSTOM AUX and continue. There are three basic displays that are used in loading the data into the conversion table. The first occurs when the table is first entered, or after a value has been changed. It shows which of the 50 table entries is being displayed, along with the current definition for that table value. For example, AUX01-M20-CUTOFF shows that the first table location is being referenced, and that a Word Address function code M20 is to be converted to perform the cut off function of the control. Another example, AUX14-33KRFOFF, indicates that table position 14 is defined to convert an ESSI 33 function code to the KERF OFF operation in the system. You can reach the table position by either pressing the numbered keys on the keypad or by using the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll through a list. If you press a numbered key, the readout immediately changes to show the new table location. You do not need to press <ENTER>; simply press the two-digit number. Once the table position you want is displayed, you can display the conversion data definition to be modified. Press the <ENTER> key to change from the DISPLAY mode to the MODIFY ENTRY mode.
PART-6:INSTAL-42
AO-73367
In the first example, where AUX01-M20-CUTOFF was displayed, if you press <ENTER>, the display changes to 32005-M20-CUTOFF. The five-digit number on the left is called the TVVFF code, where the left most digit (T) indicates the auxiliary code type as: 1 2 3 ESSI function code Word Address G function code Word Address M function code
The next two digits (VV) contain the actual number of the ESSI, or Word Address G or M code. In this example, since an M20 is to be converted, the digits are set to 20. The final two digits (FF) contain the internal function code that is assigned to the input auxiliary function code. These numbers are selected form the following table: FF Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Name PGMNOP CWARC CCWARC CHNTOP CHNBOT CUTOFF CUTON KRFOFF KRFLFT KRFRHT MRKOFF MRKON OFSOFF OFSON INCH MMETER ABSDIM ABSRPL INCDIM DWELL LEADIN PGMSTP PGMEND PGMRWD SKPON SKPOFF MRK2ON Function No operation; used to ignore auxiliary functions Clockwise arc direction Counter-clockwise arc direction Chain top Chain bottom Cut off Cut on Kerf off Kerf left Kerf right Marker #1 off Marker #1 on Marker offset off Marker offset on Programming in inch units Programming in millimeter units Absolute program dimensions Absolute register preload Incremental program dimensions Programmable dwell Special lead-in block Program stop Program end Program end with rewind Tape ignoring on Tape ignoring off Auxiliary output on
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-43
27 28 29 30-38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
MRK2OF XOFST2 YOFST2 TB SEL GOHOME TOOL PRGKRF FEEDRT HT DIS HT ENA LDAUTO
Auxiliary output off X Marker #2 offset Y Marker #2 offset Not used Overlay parameter table select Go to table home Tool select Program kerf Program feedrate Plasma height disable Plasma height enable Auto load/run
NOTE: If any table location is loaded with a TVVFF value of 00000, the software does not scan past that location. For example, if table location AUX22 contains 00000, no conversion codes contained in AUX23 through AUX50 are processed. Therefore, do not enter 00000 as the TVVFF code for any table location unless none of the following locations are used. If the conversion information at a particular table location needs to be erased, either use it for a new conversion, or enter an unused auxiliary code as a PGMNOP command. The following are several examples of typical conversion table TVVFF codes, with an explanation of their function: TVVFF- 23302 TVVFF- 12206 TVVFF- 36422 TVVFF- 31200 TVVFF- 26605 Causes incoming G33 to be loaded as a COUNTERCLOCKWISE ARC command Causes incoming ESSI 22 function code to be loaded as
CUT ON command
Causes incoming M64 to be loaded as PROGRAM END command. Causes incoming M12 to have no function; it is ignored. Causes incoming G66 to be loaded as a CUT OFF command. Normally G functions do not control cutting functions; however, the conversion table even allows for this type of re-assignment.
Using the numeric keypad, enter the desired TVVFF code. As soon as the numeric entry starts, the display changes to TVVFF- XXXXX, with the newly entered digits appearing in the XXXXX position on the readout. When you press <ENTER>, the display reverts back to the MODIFY ENTRY mode and shows the result of the new TVVFF code just entered. For example, if the display shows 32005-M20-CUTOFF and you want to change this table position to convert a G31 to the CUT ON command, use the numeric keypad to enter 23106. Each digit appears as it is entered. After all five digits are entered, the display shows TVVFF- 23106. Press <ENTER> to load the new table value. The display returns to the MODIFY ENTRY mode and shows 23106-G31-CUTON. If the value is incorrect,
PART-6:INSTAL-44
AO-73367
re-enter the correct five digit code and press <ENTER> again. Once the data is correct, press <ENTER> a second time to return to the TABLE POSITION DISPLAY, which now shows the next table position. If the previous entry had loaded the AUX01 table location, the display now shows AUX02-_______. To determine if you need this feature, consult the PART PROGRAMMING section of this manual to see if the standard auxiliary function codes for the 1250 are acceptable. If they are, there is no need for the CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTION CODE CONVERSION feature. If special conversions are required, set up this table to perform the needed reassignments. Once this table is loaded, press <RECYCLE> to exit.
SERV78- LOOP BACK

This procedure aids in debugging the RS-232 link from the 1250 to a host computer. When selected, this procedure begins sending the characters 0 - 9 and A - Z, followed by a <CR><LF>. This pattern is sent continuously as long as the clear-to-send (CTS) input line is in the active state. The display contains two data fields. The left side of the screen shows the characters that are being received on the RS-232 port, while the right side shows the status of the CTS line. If the CTS line is high (which allows the 1250 to transmit data), the right side shows CTS. If the CTS line goes low, the right side shows NOCTS. The unit can be connected to a monitor or a computer running CROSS TALK or a similar terminal emulation software package and the data link in both directions can be verified. Also, by looping the 1250 back to itself, it provides a self-check. If the screen shows that it is receiving the data being transmitted, it probably indicates that the RS-232 port of the 1250 is functioning properly. When fiber optic modems are used, the loopback can be done at two locations. Either a single fiber can be looped between the transmit and receive port of the modem inside the 1250, or the modem at the other end of the link can have its RS-232 signals looped back so that the data being sent by the 1250 goes out and back through both modems. The selection of baud rate and character format is similar to the operation of the program downloading software. The values stored in SD50 are displayed as the defaults when the loopback routine is called. The selections for program type (WADR, ESSI, etc.) and handshaking protocol (RTS, XON, etc.) do not have any effect on the loopback test. NOTE: There is a short delay after every 10 characters sent from the 1250. The data displayed in the readout when the 1250 is looped back to itself pauses and allows it to be read and checked for proper operation. This delay may be disabled by pressing <.> (the decimal point key).
SERV97- VAR STORE

This SERVICE function allows you to store the setup parameters adjusted with SERV10 and the speed calibration and reference adjustment results form SERV54 in non-volatile memory inside the 1250. If this function is not used, all adjustments return to their
AO-73367
PART-6:INSTAL-45
previous values when the power to the system is turned off or you press <RECYCLE> to switch modes of operation. VARIABLE STORE The 1250 is equipped with non-volatile memory, which is used to store the SYSTEM DATA parameters set up with the SERV10 procedure, the calibration values resulting from the SERV51 speed calibration, and SERV54 reference adjust. This memory requires no battery or external power in order to retain the data. The only way the data in the memory can be changed is by using the SERV97 procedure. Since all data values are stored together, all adjustments of the SYSTEM DATA parameters and the speed calibration should be done before using the SERV97 procedure. If any of the SYSTEM DATA parameters are readjusted at a later date, or if a second speed calibration is done, this procedure should be used again to store the changes. NOTE: It is possible to make adjustments to the SYSTEM DATA parameters without losing the original settings. To do this, use SERV10 and SERV40 - 44 to make any desired changes once a part program is already running. Do not, however, use the SERV97 procedure to store them. The 1250 uses the changed data until you press <RECYCLE> or the power is turned off. When the power is re-applied or you press <RECYCLE>, the original values still stored in non-volatile memory are returned. This can be a useful testing tool, since the values can be changed while a part is running without worrying about permanently altering the machines performance. When you select the SERV97 function, the display changes to *** WARNING *** CHECK MANUAL. At this point, press <SHF>. This stores the new values in nonvolatile memory. When the storing is complete, the unit returns to its normal operation.
SERV98- SYS. RESET

This function causes a system reset, the same as if the unit had been unplugged and plugged in again. If a new feature code is entered into the 1250, the unit must perform a SYSTEM RESET before the newly enabled feature actually becomes available. NOTE: SD98 does not save any parameters in non-volatile memory.
PART-6:INSTAL-46
AO-73367
INSTALLATION: SETUP EXAMPLE
TYPICAL SETUP EXAMPLE
TYPICAL SETUP EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

The following description is provided as an example of the normal sequence used when setting up the control on a cutting machine. It is not the only method; rather, it is a logical order that ensures that all necessary parameters are set without unnecessary work. For this example, the cutting machine has the following characteristics. Note that only inch units are used. The metric setup, however, would be the same.

System operates in INCH units. The drive system is capable of 250 IPM. 250-line motor-mounted encoders are used: the axis travels 0.0787 inches per encoder revolution. The plate to be cut is located to the left of the operator. Plasma cutting only is used.
Before starting, ensure the drive emergency stop is pushed in. This should prevent the machine from moving until the parameters are initially set. 1. Select SERV51- SPD CAL and press <ENTER>. The readout prompts you to SET SPD DIAL-THEN CYCLE START and then displays SET XXX XXXXX and the current setting of the feedrate is displayed. Do not press <CYCLE START> as the readout instructs. Instead, press <RECYCLE>. This aborts the speed calibration; the speeds, however, have been preset to full speed. After all the parameters are set, the speed calibration can be done correctly. 2. Select SERV10- SYSTEM DATA. 3. Set the following parameters as indicated. Note that some of the values are preset to an estimated value now and then fine-tuned later. These estimated values are typical entries for the parameter but are not to be taken as the only valid ones. Parameter
SD60- OPER
Set To SYS INCH
Explanation Although this is not the first parameter, it should be set first so that any other speed or distance values appear in the correct units. Standard 1250. Normal. Delay the start of motion for 0.10 seconds after the ARC ON input is received.
SD61- SYS CONFIG SD68- SPEED RANGE SD01- ARC DELAY
22 4 0.10
AO-73367
PART-6:EXAMPLE-1

SD02- BLEEDOFF
0.00
This parameter is for oxygen/fuel cutting only, and should be set to 0.00 for plasma only machines. Estimated acceleration time, which may be adjusted later. Set to maximum speed of drive system of cutting machine, given as 250 IPM. Nominal back up speed, which may be adjusted later. Nominal corner speed, which may be adjusted later. Nominal value, which may be adjusted later. This value is usually acceptable as is, but may be adjusted later. Allows machine to cut up to maximum speed capacity of the drive system. Allows machine to traverse at maximum speed capacity of the drive system. Nominal value, which may be adjusted later. Normally set to 0. Error warning distance set so a warning sounds if the machine jams and deviates from cut path by more than .25 inch. Loop gain is adjusted once a test part is run. This provides a delay before the is recognized.
ARC OFF condition
SD03- ACCEL TIME SD04- MAX DRV SPD
20.0 250.00
SD06- BACKUP SPD SD07- CORNER SPD SD08- MIN HOLD SPD SD09- MAX ERR SPD SD10- RUN SPD LMIT
40.0 EST 10.0 EST 2.00 EST 120.0 EST 250.00
SD11- TRV SPD LMT
250.00
SD12- MIN ACCEL SD14- GAIN BREAK SD15- ERR WRN DST
0.10 0 .25 EST
SD15- LOOP GAIN SD17- ARC OFF TIME
2.00 EST 0.50
SD18- SLWDWN DIST
2.00 EST
Nominal slow down distance, which is adjusted when a test part is run. Look-ahead distance for disabling height sensor relay. Given value for distance covered in one revolution of X axis encoder. Given value for distance covered in one revolution of Y axis encoder.
SD19- DISABLE DIST SD20- X DIST/REV
0.75 4.7660
SD21- Y DIST/REV
4.7660
PART-6:EXAMPLE-2
AO-73367
INSTALLATION: SETUP EXAMPLE

SD22- ENC LIN/REV SD23- X ENC DIR SD24- Y ENC DIR SD25- X DRIVE DIR SD26- Y DRIVE DIR SD27- PLATE SIDE
8000
NORM NORM REV REV LEFT
Encoders specified as 200 lines per revolution. Preset, but must be tested. Preset, but must be tested. Preset, but must be tested. Preset, but must be tested. Information given stated that plate is cut to the left of the operator. Relay is used for plasma auto height disable. Not used in oxygen/fuel cutting. Nominal slow down radius although this value seems correct for many machines. Typical minimum radius speeds are between 10 - 30 IPM. Adjusted later if necessary. Plasma overlay table is not used. Typical value for most machines. Typical value for most machines. Marker offset in the X direction. Marker offset in the Y direction. Plate marking speed. Marker delay time in seconds. Default dwell time in seconds. Nominal value, which gives a .5 seconds delay after any function is turned off. Not used. Not used. Delay for 2.00 seconds. See INSTALLATION AND SETUP. See INSTALLATION AND SETUP. No special end of program. ASCII for CNC. Given information. Digital feedrate, home limit switches, teachable preheat
SD28- HEIGHT RELAY
NORM
SD29- SLWDWN RAD
4.00
SD30- MIN RAD SPD
30.00
SD31- PLASMA TB1 SD32- MIN SLW ANG SD33- MAX SLW ANG SD40- X MARKER OFFSET SD41- Y MARKER OFFSET SD42- MARKING SPEED SD43- MARKER DELAY SD45- DEFAULT DWELL SD46- MIN OFF DLY
NO
10 22 0 0 0 0 0 .50 EST
SD47- X OFFSET #2 SD48- Y OFFSET #2 SD49-START DELAY SD50- SERIAL DEFN SD51- PRGM FORMAT SD52- SPEC EOP SD53- FILE EXTEN SD60- OPER SYS SD62- SYS CONFIG2
0.00 0.00 .20 2135 00000000 00000000 434E4300

INCH
06000003
AO-73367
PART-6:EXAMPLE-3
1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual time, and speed-dependent accleration enabled. After the values are preset, the following procedures will help in adjusting the values. +X MACHINE DIRECTIONS +Y -X 1. Temporarily change SD8- MIN HOLD SPD to 0.00 so the encoder feedback has no influence. 2. Turn up the feedrate and jog the machine in the +X direction. The machine should move in the rail axis, away from you. If the machine moves toward you in the X axis, reverse the setting of SD25- X DRIVE DIR to the opposite setting (NORM or REV). If the machine moves in the cross axis, the wires to the drives are crossed. Correct the wiring, re-enter the preset values, and go on. 3. Jog the machine in the +Y direction. The machine should move in the cross axis, to the left. If the machine moves to the right when you press the +Y jog, reverse the setting of SD26- Y DRIVE DIR to the opposite setting (NORM or REV). 4. Set the direction of the encoders. Use SERV01- X/Y DSPLY to show the X and Y positions and press <CE> to clear the X and Y values. Jog the machine in the +X direction to move down the rail. If the X readout counts positive (+), the X axis encoder direction is correct. If the X position counts negative (-), reverse the setting of SD23- X ENC DIR to the opposite setting (NORM or REV). 5. Jog in the +Y direction. If the Y position counts positive (+), the Y axis encoder direction is correct. If the Y position counts negative (-), reverse the setting of SD24- Y ENC DIR to the opposite setting (NORM or REV). 6. Reset SD8- MIN HLD SPD to 2.00. 7. Select SERV54-AUTOMATIC REFERENCE ADJUSTMENT. Adjust the feedrate to the full speed maximum position. Press <ENTER>. The readout temporarily shows the data and calibration values, and then displays FEEDRATE= 250.00. At this point, the value displayed on the readout should be the same as the value entered for the maximum drive speed in SD04 (250 for this example). 8. Set the control to test run a 5.00 inch diameter CHAIN CIRCLE part. Start the test run and adjust the feedrate to full speed. While the machine is going around the circle, if the path oscillates, reduce the setting of SD16- LOOP GAIN until the oscillation stops. If no oscillation is noted, try raising SD16- LOOP GAIN value until the shaking starts and then reduce it until it just stops. Now check the performance of the machine as it slows for each corner of the part. If it appears to be banging into the corners rather than smoothly decelerating, either increase SD18- SLOWDOWN DIST or decrease SD07- CORNER SPD values. Since this is a trial and error type of adjustment, it is impossible to predict which adjustment gives the best results. Similarly, if the corners appear mushy, reduce SD18- SLOWDOWN DIST or increase SD07- CORNER SPD. After the PART-6:EXAMPLE-4 AO-73367 -Y
INSTALLATION: SETUP EXAMPLE machine slows for a corner, notice the acceleration out of the corner back to full speed. If it appears too long, reduce SD03- ACCEL TIME value. Similarly if the acceleration appears too fast, increase the acceleration time. 9. Now select shape 23 (SQUARE- RADIN) and enter the appropriate dimensions to create a 5 inch rectangular part. Enter a corner radius of 0.10 inch in order to check SD30-MIN RAD SPD. Run the part at full speed and notice the speed during the small radii in the corners. If it appears that the radius runs too slowly, increase SD30-MIN RAD SPD. If the machine overshoots the radius or seems to be running the small corner radii too quickly, lower the SD30-MIN RAD SPD value. The objective of all these adjustments is to provide the smoothest, most accurate operation with a minimum of time spent in the corners. Try various combinations of adjustments to get the optimum performance. 10. If the machine drives are well balanced, there is no need to do the automatic speed calibration. However, if the speeds are not balanced, the automatic speed calibration routine should be performed. See SERV51- SPD CAL. After all parameters are adjusted, and the speed calibration is done, go to the SERV97VAR STORE section of the manual and store the new values in the non-volatile memory.
AO-73367
PART-6:EXAMPLE-5
1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual 1250 TYPICAL SETUP QUICK REFERENCE
System Data Parameters 01 0.10 35 02 0 36 03 20 37 04 250.00 38 05 Not used 39 06 40.00 40 07 10.00 41 08 2.00 42 09 120.00 43 10 250.00 44 11 250.00 45 12 .10 46 13 Not used 47 14 00 48 15 1.0000 49 16 2.00 50 17 0.50 51 18 2.00 52 19 0.7500 53 20 4.7660 54 21 4.7660 55 22 8000 56 23 NORM 57 24 NORM 58 25 REV 59 26 REV 60 27 LEFT 61 28 NORM 62 29 4.00 63 30 30.00 64 31 NO 65 32 10 66 33 22 67 34 Not used
Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 0.0000 0.0000 0.00 0.00 Not used 0.00 0.50 0.0000 0.0000 0.20 2135 00000000 00000000 434E4300 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used INCH 22 06000003 Not used Not used 0000 Not used Not used
68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 A0 A1 A2
4 0 0.00 0 Not used Not used 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.000
Main Card Jumpers J2 B J3
J4
J5
PART-6:EXAMPLE-6
AO-73367
MACHINE: MACHINE INTERFACE
MACHINE INTERFACE
RELAY CARD TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

The 1250 Relay Card provides the necessary hardware to bring in the incoming power and the mechanical relays used to interface to the machine. The plasma hook-up is through a male 16-pin CPC connector. The incoming AC line enters the 1250 through a male 7-pin CPC connector, as follows:
Position Function
Pin 1 Hot
Pins 4 and 6 Earth Ground
Pin 5 Neutral
LINE POWER INPUT

The AC incoming line enters the Relay Card through male 0.25 in tabs. The hot side immediately encounters the system fuse. The neutral side is connected to one side of the RC snubber and is daisy-chained to more neutral terminals. The fused hot goes to the line jumper, which selects the incoming power. The two positions are 115 and 230. The placement of the jumper determines which primary tap of the power transformer is used. The 115 primary tap also powers the 115 volt cooling fan and the primary of the small transformer used for the PLASMA CUT SENSE input.
LIFTER
The lifter toggle switchs power comes from an external supply. The lifter toggle switch has three positions: momentary up with spring return, momentary down with spring return, and maintained center off. The lifters power exits the 1250 through a female 4-pin CPC connector, as follows:
Position Function
Pin 1 Supply
Pin 2 Up Winding
Pin 3 Down Winding
Pin 4 Chassis Ground
AO-73367
PART-7:MACHINE-1
POWER SUPPLY
The secondary of the power transformer is wired to a full wave bridge rectifier. The output of the bridge is unregulated 30 VDC. This is wired to the Relay Card and is filtered by capacitors C1 and C2.
EMERGENCY STOP
The input to the emergency stop switch is the 30 VDC supply. When the emergency stop switch is released, the output of the switch energizes CR6 on the Relay Card. CR6 is used as the control relay for the drives. When CR6 is de-energized, the drives are off and the 24 VDC supply voltage for the other relays is also off.
PLASMA CUT SENSE

The PLASMA CUT SENSE input can accept an AC or DC voltage between 24 and 230 volts, or a potential free contact closure from the plasma unit. The input voltage is rectified, filtered, and isolated by an opto-coupler. When the plasma cut sense voltage is present, the LED in the optcoupler is on and the photo-transistor in the opto-coupler conducts outputting the CUT ON SENSE signal, which is used by the micro-processor card to determine when the plasma arc is firing. The PLASMA CUT SENSE input is wired as follows: Position Function Pin 13 24 VAC Output Pin 14 O V Output or Input Pin 15 24 - 115 V Input Pin 16 230 V Input
MARKER
The PLATE MARKER control relay (CR5) is controlled by the micro-processor. A potential free Form C contact is provided for the plate marker, as follows: Position Function Pin 10 Common Pin 11 Normally Closed Output Pin 12 Normally Open Output
PART-7:MACHINE-2
AO-73367
HEIGHT DISABLE
The HEIGHT SENSOR DISABLE control relay (CR4) is controlled by the micro-processor. A potential free Form C contact is provided for the height sensor, as follows: Position Function Pin 7 Common Pin 8 Normally Open Output Pin 9 Normally Closed Output
PLASMA START
The PLASMA START control relay (CR3) is controlled by the micro-processor. A potential free Form C contact is provided for the plasma unit, as follows: Position Function Pin 1 Common Pin 3 Normally Open Output Pin 2 Normally Closed Output
PLASMA STOP
The PLASMA STOP control relay (CR1) is controlled by the micro-processor. A potential free Form C contact is provided for the plasma unit, as follows: Position Function Pin 4 Common Pin 6 Normally Open Output Pin 5 Normally Closed Output
DIP SWITCH
The DIP switch allows flexibility to several of the control relays, as follows: Position On (Closed) Switch 1 Maintained
PLASMA STOP
Switch 2 PLASMA
START
Switch 3 Maintained
PLASMA START
Switch 4 Internal plasma relay for arc sense

ON
relay contact Off (Open) Momentary

PLASMA STOP
bypass Normal
PLASMA START
relay contact Momentary

PLASMA START
External ARC sense input
relay contact
relay contact
AO-73367
PART-7:MACHINE-3
INTERFACE CARD TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

The Interface Card provides the electronics necessary to allow analog and digital inputs and outputs to be passed back and forth between the Micro-processor Card and the rest of the system. The following represents a summary of I/O for the Interface Card.
POWER SUPPLY
An unregulated 30 VDC enters the Interface Card and is converted to a regulated 15 VDC, + 12 VDC and +5 VDC.
ANALOG INPUTS TO INTERFACE CARD

Rail digital to analog speed reference from the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 33. Cross digital to analog speed reference from the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 40.
ANALOG OUTPUTS FROM INTERFACE CARD

Digital to analog reference to the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 41. Analog to digital reference to the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 48. Rail speed reference to the Drive Card PL3 Pin 10. Cross speed reference to the Drive Card PL3 Pin 6.
ENCODER INPUTS TO INTERFACE CARD

The rail and cross encoders signals (A, /A, B, /B, M, /M) from PL1.
ENCODER OUTPUTS FROM INTERFACE CARD

The rail A encoder signal to the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 45. The rail B encoder signal to the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 44. The cross A encoder signal to the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 43. The cross B encoder signal to the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 42.
DIGITAL INPUTS TO INTERFACE CARD

The PLASMA SELECT input from the Drive Card PL3 Pin 31. The CUT ON sense input from the Drive Card PL3 Pin 30. The BEEPER ON signal from the Micro-processor Card is PL4 Pin 47. The HEIGHT SENSE disable signal from the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 10
PART-7:MACHINE-4
AO-73367
The CUT ON signal from the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 11. The CUT OFF signal from the Micro-processor Card PL4 Pin 8.
DIGITAL OUTPUTS FROM INTERFACE CARD

The BEEPER ON signal to the beeper PL2 Pin 6. The HEIGHT SENSE disable signal to the Drive Card PL3 Pin 33. The MARKER signal to the Drive Card PL3 Pin 32. The CUT ON signal to the Drive Card PL3 Pin 30. The CUT OFF signal to the Drive Card PL3 Pin 29.
AO-73367
PART-7:MACHINE-5
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT OPERATING LIMITS
Temperature Relative Humidity Atmospheric pressure Climatic Class 0 to 50 C 5% to 85% (1 g/m3 to 25 g/m3) 86 kPa to 106 kPa 3K3
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The Burny 1250 is intended for use in heavy industrial environment. It is not intended for use in commercial or light industry environments.
MYY-10770 BURNY 1250 PLUS rear panel POWER connector Electrical Ratings for CE Compliant Installations
(Any pins not listed in the table are not used do not make any connection to these pins) PIN # DESCRIPTION RATINGS 1 Line HOT input Proper voltage is set by internal jumper for 115 or 230 V max AC, 50/60 Hz, 6.3 A maximum. IMPORTANT: Set internal jumper according to voltage to be used. See Installation section of operation manual. Protected by FUPWR fuse on rear panel, a 6.3 A time delay fuse. 5 Line NEUTRAL input Neutral connection for pin 1 ac power. 4, 6 Chassis Ground (18 AWG wire)
MYX-10770 BURNY 1250 PLUS rear panel PLASMA connector Electrical Ratings for CE Compliant Installations
(Any pins not listed in the table are not used do not make any connection to these pins) PIN # DESCRIPTION RATINGS 1 Common contacts of the normally 230V max AC, 50/60 Hz, or 24V max DC open and normally closed contact sets 2A Max of the Plasma Start Relay 2 One side of the Plasma Start Relays 230V max AC, 50/60 Hz, or 24V max DC normally closed contacts 2A Max 3 One side of the Plasma Start Relays 230V max AC, 50/60 Hz, or 24V max DC normally open contacts 2A Max 4 Common contacts of the normally 230V max AC, 50/60 Hz, or 24V max DC open and normally closed contact sets 2A Max of the Plasma Stop Relay 5 One side of the Plasma Stop Relays 230V max AC, 50/60 Hz, or 24V max DC normally closed contacts 2A Max 6 One side of the Plasma Stop Relays 230V max AC, 50/60 Hz, or 24V max DC normally open contacts 2A Max 7 Common contacts of the normally 230V max AC, 50/60 Hz, or 24V max DC open and normally closed contact sets 2A Max of the Height Sensor Disable Relay
PART-7:MACHINE-6
AO-73367
8 9 14 15 16
One side of the Height Sensor Disable Relays normally open contacts One side of the Height Sensor Disable Relays normally closed contacts Arc On Sense Input - return Arc On Sense Input Arc On Sense Input
230V max AC, 50/60 Hz, or 24V max DC 2A Max 230V max AC, 50/60 Hz, or 24V max DC 2A Max Return for signal of pin 15 or 16. 24-115 V DC or AC 50 or 60 Hz; 30 mA max 115-230 V DC or AC 50 or 60 Hz; 30 mA max
MYX-10770 Burny 1250 PLUS rear panel CMTR and RMTR connectors Electrical Ratings for CE Compliant Installations
(Any pins not listed in the table are not used do not make any connection to these pins) PIN # DESCRIPTION RATINGS 3, 5 Clutch (optional) 230 V max AC, 50/60 Hz, or 24 V max DC. (Isolated Form-A dry-contact relay) 2A max CR5,6,7, 2, 8 Rail Axis Motor 30 VDC, 4A 1, 4 Rail Axis Tach 20 V, 5 mA max 6 Input for + limit switch 10 mA required to pull the 24 VDC input to common on pin 7. 7 Input common for limit switches 25 mA, to be used as common for pins 7 and 9. 9 Input for - limit switch 10 mA required to pull the 24 VDC input to common on pin 7.
MYX-10770 Burny 1250 PLUS rear panel RENC and CENC connectors Electrical Ratings for CE Compliant Installations
(Any pins not listed in the table are not used do not make any connection to these pins) PIN # DESCRIPTION RATINGS Single-ended encoders Differential encoders SW on Interface Board all open SW on Interface Board all closed 1 Supply Common 0V 0V (to power encoder) 2 /Z channel input Not used, do not connect anything to Differential driver input paired with this pin. pin 6. 150 internal resistor to ground. Minimum differential: 500 mV. Maximum differential: 5 V. 3 /A channel input Not used, do not connect anything to Differential driver input paired with this pin, pin 8. 150 internal resistor to ground. Minimum differential: 500 mV. Maximum differential: 5 V. 5 /B channel input Not used, do not connect anything to Differential driver input paired with this pin, pin 9. 150 internal resistor to ground. Minimum differential: 500 mV. Maximum differential: 5 V. 6 Z channel input Designed for open-collector type Differential driver input paired with input. pin 2. 150 internal resistor to HIGH = Pulled to +5 VDC supply with ground. 4.7 k internal resistor. 3 VDC Minimum differential: 500 mV. minimum. Maximum differential: 5 V. LOW = Pull down to Supply Common. 1 VDC maximum.
AO-73367
PART-7:MACHINE-7
7 8
+5 VDC supply output (to power encoder ) A channel input
+5 VDC @ 500 mA Designed for open-collector type input. HIGH = Pulled to +5 VDC supply with 4.7 k internal resistor. 3 VDC minimum. LOW = Pull down to Supply Common. 1 VDC maximum. Designed for open-collector type input. HIGH = Pulled to +5 VDC supply with 4.7 k internal resistor. 3 VDC minimum. LOW = Pull down to Supply Common. 1 VDC maximum.
+5 VDC @ 500 mA Differential driver input paired with pin 3. 150 internal resistor to ground. Minimum differential: 500 mV. Maximum differential: 5 V. Differential driver input paired with pin 5. 150 internal resistor to ground. Minimum differential: 500 mV. Maximum differential: 5 V.
B channel input
MYX-10770 Burny 1250 PLUS rear panel LIFTER connector Electrical Ratings for CE Compliant Installations
(Any pins not listed in the table are not used do not make any connection to these pins) PIN # DESCRIPTION RATINGS 1 Power to Lifter Switch 5 A max., 24V AC or DC. 2 Output- Lifter up 5 A max., 24V AC or DC 3 Output - Lifter down 5 A max., 24V AC or DC 4 Ground to system ground, and to Lifter 5 A max., 24V AC or DC Supply voltage ground.
MYX-10770 Burny 1250 PLUS rear panel COMM connector Electrical Ratings for CE Compliant Installations
(Any pins not listed in the table are not used do not make any connection to these pins) PIN # RS-232 signal RS-422 signal 2 Input: R IN - Received data input B - received data input into Burny 1250 3 XOUT - Transmitted data output B - transmitted data output from Burny 1250 4 Output: +5 VDC, 25mA Output: +5 VDC @ 25 mA 5 Output: +12 VDC, 25mA Output +12 VDC @ 25 mA 6 Output: -12 VDC, 25mA Output -12 VDC @ 25 mA 7 Signal ground Signal ground 8 Output: control status line A - transmitted data output from Burny 1250 9 Input: status line A - received data input to Burny 1250
PART-7:MACHINE-8
AO-73367
ERROR MESSAGES: ERROR
ERROR MESSAGES
This section contains error messages, which may be displayed during operation. In some cases, the error is merely an incorrect number entry. Other error messages may indicate a hardware or software problem, which should not occur under any circumstances.
ERRORS FROM PROGRAM OPERATIONS

These errors can occur during any of the operations for the major program functions (RUN, LOAD, etc.). DUPLICATE PROGRAM When you select LOAD and enter a program number to be used in storing the data, it is checked to make sure that no other program already stored in memory has the same number. If a duplicate number is found, this error is displayed. Either use the DELETE function to erase the duplicate or enter a different program number for the new program. This error indicates that no programs are stored in memory. It occurs, for instance, when you use the DELETE function, and there are no programs to delete. This message is displayed when a program number of 00000000 is entered for any function. Zero may not be used for a program number. This message is displayed if you select RUN, DELETE, or STORE and enter a program number that is not in memory. Correct the program number and re-enter it. This error can be displayed when you select any of the functions. It indicates that a potential power loss was detected and that program memory has been set to a protected state. This is done so that if a power loss does occur, the programs in memory remain intact. Press <RECYCLE> to re-enable and test the memory. This error is displayed when you select LOAD and program memory is full and cannot accept another program. Use the DELETE function to erase any unneeded programs and re-enter the desired function. This is not an error condition but merely a data display. It occurs in any function mode when you use the UP and DOWN scroll arrow keys to scroll through the list of available programs. This message is followed by the number of
PROGRAM LIST EMPTY
ENTER PROGRAM NUMBER
NO PROGRAM FOUND
MEMORY DISABLED
PROGRAM MEMORY FULL
END OF LIST
AO-73367
PART-8:ERROR-1
bytes of memory currently used for program storage and the number remaining available for new programs. 0 BYTES IN PROGRAM This message is displayed if you select a program that has no program data in it and cannot run. This may occur if a program load is started but not completed. The program space was created in memory, but the program was never stored. Delete the program and either re-load it or run a different one. Each time you press <RECYCLE>, the main system memory used for storing part programs is checked for any data or format errors. If all tests pass, the main SELECT FUNCTION prompt is displayed. However, if an error is detected, this message is displayed. Press <RECYCLE> again to try to clear the error. If the memory can be reset, the usual SELECT FUNCTION prompt is displayed.
RECYCLE ERRORS
DATA ERROR - RESET MEMORY This message indicates that the program is invalid and unusable. To abort the reset operation, press the <+/-> key to make the word NO in the readout flash and press <ENTER>. This does not correct the problem however, and program memory is not reset. To reset memory and return to normal operation, press the <+/-> key to make the word YES in the readout flash, then press <ENTER>. When the reset operation is selected, a further prompt is issued to make sure that you realize this operation erases all programs in memory. To continue with the reset, press the <+/-> key to make the word YES in the readout flash, and then press <ENTER>. RESET MODE ONLY Some operations cannot be used while others are running. If they are attempted at the wrong time, this message is displayed and the operation does not execute. To perform the desired operation, you must stop the current operation. Press <RECYCLE> and select the function again.
RUN TIME ERRORS

These error messages only appear while a part program is actually running. PATH ERROR The 1250 constantly monitors the machine position while a part is being run. If it detects that the path has deviated by more that a preset value (selected during installation), it issues a warning message accompanied by a beeping
PART-8:ERROR-2
AO-73367
ERROR MESSAGES: ERROR
sequence. This warning does not stop the machine, but only warns you that the part being cut is not within the preset error distance.
ERRORS DURING SERIAL I/O OPERATIONS

Several conditions can occur during the SERIAL I/O operations that cause error messages to be displayed. READ TIMEOUT This error indicates that the data being received by the 1250 stopped for longer than the nominal time-out value (60 seconds). The operation has been aborted. This error indicates that data transmission has been delayed due to an in-operative device being connected to the RS-232 port for longer than a the nominal time-out value (60 seconds). This error indicates that during a serial operation, a parity error was detected and caused the operation to abort. During data reception, if the data is transmitted too fast, or is sent at the wrong baud rate, an overrun error occurs and terminates the operation. During data reception, a received character with the wrong number of bits causes this error to be displayed and terminates the operation. This can occur if noise is present on the transmission line or if the wrong baud rate is used. This error indicates that the handshaking controlling the communication did not work and that data was lost. If the program being received does not match the specified program format type (ESSI, Word Address, etc.) during a LOAD operation, this error message is displayed.
WRITE TIMEOUT
PARITY ERROR
OVERRUN ERROR
FRAMING ERROR
DATA COMM ERROR
FORMAT ERROR
PROGRAM NUMBER WARNING When a LOAD operation is complete, the program number contained in the transmitted data is compared to the number you requested. If these two do not match, this warning is displayed. The program is loaded, however, as the number requested.
AO-73367
PART-8:ERROR-3
BLANK
RETROFIT: RETROFIT EXPLANATION
RETROFIT AND INSTALLATION
GENERAL EXPLANATION OF A CNC RETROFIT

The main reason to add a 1250 control to a cutting machine is to increase productivity. The 1250 also eliminates the need to use a template, adds accuracy to the shape being cut, and makes the operator's job of cutting easier. A 1250 can be installed on almost any cutting machine with an X/Y coordinate drive system. The 1250 provides NC control with the capability of switching back to photocell control if desired. The objective of this installation section is to graphically explain the mounting of necessary hardware used by the 1250 to run the cutting machine. Drawings are located at the end of this section that show the hardware that the 1250 uses and how it is mounted on a cutting machine. By using the drawings and following the specified rules for correct mounting procedure, it should be possible to mount the necessary hardware on almost any cutting machine. It would be difficult to supply a drawing for every cutting machine, but this section gives the basic idea of the hardware mounting procedure. The actual method implemented by the customer is determined by the personal preference and added input from personnel involved in the project.
MOUNTING THE GEAR RACK

1. Always try to mount the gear rack teeth facing sideways or facing down. Mounting the rack with the teeth facing up causes the rack to accumulate cutting dirt and the teeth to become clogged, which may create dimensional errors. 2. Mount the gear rack directly to the machine, if possible. If this method does not allow for proper clearance or encoder mesh into the gear rack, another method must be used. For example, mount the gear rack on a separate angle bracket. By doing this, the gear rack is away from the cutting machine surface to give extra clearance for proper mesh. Washers or spacers can also be used to move the gear rack away from the cutting machine surface for added clearance. 3. Be sure that the gear rack covers the entire travel distance of both rail and cross axis. Allow enough rack at all travel limit ends so the encoder does not go off the end of the gear rack. 4. When joining two sections of rack, always use a short piece (about 2 or 3 inches) to obtain proper mesh between six foot rack sections. Invert the short piece of rack into the two sections that are being joined together, over the joint to obtain proper mesh. Do NOT butt two sections against each other; this causes an improper mesh and may result in dimensional errors on parts being cut. 5. Use whatever means possible to ensure that the gear rack is straight both horizontally and vertically. A bowed rack causes dimensional errors on parts being cut.
AO-73367
PART-9:RETROFIT-1
MOUNTING THE ENCODER

The 1250 uses digital encoders to provide a feedback pulse, which tells the 1250 exactly where it is at all times. Mounting the encoders incorrectly causes the 1250 to get false distance readings, which, in turn, causes the cut part to be the wrong size. The following rules are provided so that encoders are mounted correctly, ensuring that accurate feedback is supplied to the 1250, which ensures the parts being cut are correct dimensionally. 1. Choose a suitable location for encoder mounting. Try to stay away from mounting the encoder in a vulnerable location, such as the end of a rail truck or next to the torches. 2. Always have the encoder parallel to the gear rack (see drawing # B0-19621). The distance from the center of the encoder shaft and distance from the center of the shoulder screw pivot should be the same distance to the gear rack. 3. On a bridge-type machine with a dual rail axis, always mount the rail encoder on the tracing table side, away from the cutting torch side. 4. On a cantilever machine, always mount the rail encoder on the center support beam. If possible, mount the rail axis encoder on the tracing table side, away from the cutting torch side. 5. If possible, mount the cross axis encoder to the cross axis drive gearbox. Mounting the encoder to the tracing eye is acceptable, but use this method only as a second choice. 6. Encoders come with a universal mounting bracket. (See Drawing # BO-19618). The mounting bracket configuration can be re-arranged to meet mounting requirements. 7. Always leave enough clearance from the top of the encoder housing to any part of the cutting machine. An encoder cable is plugged into the connector on top of the encoder housing. This calls for a 3-inch clearance from the top of the housing to any part of the cutting machine. 8. Encoders are spring-loaded with minimum tension into the gear rack. Encoders do not require a great amount of tension to hold them for proper mesh with the gear rack. Just enough tension to keep the encoder firmly meshed and to keep it from popping out of the rack will do. Too much tension will damage the encoder. A conventional tension or compression spring can be used to springload the encoder into the gear rack. 9. After the encoders are mounted, be sure to run the cutting machine to all maximum travel limits. Verify that nothing interferes with either encoder. 10. Avoid any sharp impacts to the encoder. Sharp impacts will damage the encoder.
PART-9:RETROFIT-2
AO-73367
DETERMINING CABLE LENGTH

1. Always determine the location of the 1250 and encoders before measuring for cable lengths. In general, the cable lengths that are needed depend on the application and what additional options are ordered with the 1250. 2. When measuring for cables, do NOT measure in a straight line from point to point. Allow enough cable for proper routing with existing machine cables. 3. Encoder cables are always needed for the 1250 application. To determine the length of the encoders cables, first decide where the encoders will be mounted. Then measure the length from each encoder (X and Y) to the lower back panel of the 1250. The two lengths normally will be different. 4. Generally, the cross axis encoder cable is longer then the rail axis encoder cable. Because the 1250 and the rail axis encoder are both stationary, the distance from the 1250 to the rail axis encoder is fixed. The cross axis encoder cable length is determined by measuring from the 1250 to the cross axis drive, where the encoder is mounted. This cable should be long enough to reach both limits of the axis. 5. The determination of cable lengths is very important. In general, always allow more (at least an extra 18 to 24 inches). Note that while it is important to make sure all cables are long enough, extremely long cables can act as an antenna for electrical noise. 6. For plasma cutting applications, all 1250 cables must be routed to keep them separated from any plasma cables by a minimum of two feet. This is done to minimize the possible damage caused by high frequency spikes produced by a plasma system.
AO-73367
PART-9:RETROFIT-3
PART-9:RETROFIT-4
AO-73367
AO-73367
PART-9:RETROFIT-5
PART-9:RETROFIT-6
AO-73367
AO-73367
PART-9:RETROFIT-7
PART-9:RETROFIT-8
AO-73367
AO-73367
PART-9:RETROFIT-9
PART-9:RETROFIT-10
AO-73367
AO-73367
PART-9:RETROFIT-11
PART-9:RETROFIT-12
AO-73367
SERVO: DRIVES AND CALIBRATION
DRIVES AND CALIBRATION
SERVO DRIVE ADJUSTMENTS (120 Watt PWM Drive MO-10773)

WARNING: Do not plug the motor/encoder cables into the unit. Set the line voltage jumper on the Relay Card MO-10727 to match the incoming line voltage. Apply power and turn to release the emergency stop on the side of the control. Severe damage to the control can occur if the line voltage jumper is set incorrectly. When necessary, perform the following adjustments: 1. CNC Parameters: Set SD08 MIN HOLD SPEED to 0.00 while performing the Servo Drive adjustments so the 1250 cannot influence the calibration. 2. CNC Interface Card Jumper: Set the FEEDRATE Jumper J3 to the analog feedrate position for the 1250. 3. CNC Interface Card Adjustments: With the speedpot at maximum and the range selector in the HIGH position, connect a DC voltmeter between the COM test point and the center pin of jumper J4. Adjust P1 analog to digital reference until the meter reads 7.20 VDC (0.01 VDC). Connect a DC voltmeter between the COM test point and the bottom side of resistor R9 on the Interface Card MO10796. Set the feedrate for maximum. Perform a maintained jog in the rail (X) axis. Adjust the rail output pot (P2) until the voltage reads 3.00 VDC (0.01 VDC). Move the voltmeter to the bottom side of resistor R10. Perform a maintained jog in the cross (Y) axis. Adjust the cross output pot (P3) until the voltage reads 3.00 VDC (0.01 VDC). Stop the jog mode. Push in the Emergency Stop. 4. Motor Tachometer Polarity Verification: Hook up the motor/encoder pigtails to the motor/encoder cables and plug the cables into the 1250. Turn to release the emergency stop. If the motors run away, verify that the tachometer wiring is intact. If the wiring looks unbroken, then push in the Emergency Stop and reverse the tachometer wiring. Turn to release the Emergency Stop on the side of the control. This should correct the run-away condition. 5. Deadband Adjustment (P12, P13): Connect a DC voltmeter between M1 and M2 on the rail motor. Short COM (TP1) to X (TP2) on the Drive Card MO10773. Set the feedrate for maximum. Perform a maintained jog in the rail (X) axis. Adjust the rail deadband pot XD (P12) until voltage appears on the meter, then back off until the voltage is 0.01 VDC (0.001 VDC). Repeat the procedure with the cross (Y) motor by shorting COM (TP1) to Y (TP3) and adjusting the cross deadband pot YD (P13). Stop the jog mode. Remove shorts. 6. Offset Adjustment (P4, P5): Connect a DC voltmeter between motor terminals M1 and M2. With power on and the emergency stop released, note any movement in the axes motors or any voltage on the meter. Adjust the rail offset pot XO (P4) to remove any drift in the rail motor. Adjust the cross offset pot YO (P5) to remove any drift in the cross motor.
AO-73367
PART-10:SERVO-1
7. Velocity Adjustment (P10, P11): Jog the machine in the rail (X) direction while monitoring the machine speed. This can be done by performing a SERVICE MODE 50 AXIS SPEED DISPLAY with the CNC as long the encoder parameters have been entered. Adjust XV (P10) for maximum desired speed. Repeat for cross (Y) direction using YV (P11) to adjust speed. Reset SD08 MIN HOLD SPEED to the original value. 8. Current Adjustment (P1): Place J1 in the "4A" position. Connect a DC voltmeter between COM (TP1) and Pin 5 of the Interface Card. Adjust P1 for +1.25 V (0.01 V). 9. Stability Adjustment (P6, P7): Adjust the rail stability pot XS (P6) and the cross stability pot YS (P7) clockwise until the motors run quietly (no unstable, high frequency noise). Test the drives at various speeds and at zero speed to verify the stability is adjusted correctly. 10. Notch Filter adjustment (P8, P9): The notch filter is used to remove low frequency oscillations that may occur when the machine makes sudden changes in direction, such as when maneuvering a corner. The filters can be put into or left out of the loop by selecting the appropriate jumper settings on PL2 (See JUMPER SETTINGS below). Adjust the rail notch filter pot XN (P8) and the cross notch filter pot YN (P9) until the notch filters eliminate the machine oscillation. The adjustments may be different for the rail and the cross axis.
JUMPER SETTINGS (120 Watt PWM Drive MO-10773)

J1: J2: Selects the maximum continuous operating current of the drive. Select 4A (4 Amps). Selects the type of limit switch contacts on the machine. Select either NO (normally open) or NC (normally closed), which refers to the state of the contacts when the machine is not on a limit switch. Selects between BRAKE or COAST to a stop when a limit switch is encountered. Select position B. Select position B. Select position A. Selects the type of control: position A if there is a tracer or position B if there is not a tracer. Select position B.
J3: J4: J5: J6: J7:
Option Plug (PL2) Jumper Settings CONFIGURATION No Notch Filters With Notch Filters PL2 JUMPER SETTINGS Jumper: 1-3, 2-4, 5-7, 6-8 Jumper: 1-3, 5-7, 13-14, 15-16
PART-10:SERVO-2
AO-73367
INDEX
ACCELERATION TIME (PART-6:INSTAL-5), (PART-6:INSTAL-8), (PART-6:INSTAL-27), (PART-6:INSTAL-31), (PART-6:INSTAL-32), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-2), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-5) ARC OFF DELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-5), (PART-6:INSTAL-12) ARC ON DELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-7), (PART-6:INSTAL-36) ARC ON SENSE (PART-7:MACHINE-3) AUTO CUT (PART-2:RUN-3), (PART-2:RUN-4), (PART-2:RUN-8) AUTOMATIC REFERENCE ADJUSTMENT (PART-6:INSTAL-41), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-4) AXIS SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-39) AXIS SPEED DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-39) BACKUP SPEED (PART-4:WADR-3) (PART-4:ESSI-2), (PART-6:INSTAL-5), (PART-6:INSTAL-8), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-2) BLEED-OFF TIME (PART-6:INSTAL-1), (PART-6:INSTAL-5), (PART-6:INSTAL-7), (PART-6:INSTAL-16), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-1) BP INPUT (PART-6:INSTAL-36) BP OUT (PART-6:INSTAL-36) CAD LINK (PART-5:SERIAL-17) CHARACTER FORMATS (PART-5:SERIAL-1), (PART-5:SERIAL-13) COMMUNICATION ENHANCEMENT OPTION (PART-5:SERIAL-1), (PART-5:SERIAL-15), (PART-5:SERIAL-16) CONNECTING TO RS-232C (PART-5:SERIAL-5) CORNER SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-5), (PART-6:INSTAL-8), (PART-6:INSTAL-9), (PART-6:INSTAL-15), (PART-6:INSTAL-31), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-2) CUSTOM AUX (PART-4:PROG-1), (PART-5:SERIAL-20), (PART-6:INSTAL-3), (PART-6:INSTAL-20), (PART-6:INSTAL-40), (PART-6:INSTAL-41), (PART-6:INSTAL-42), (PART-6:INSTAL-45) CUTTING MODE (PART-2:RUN-1), (PART-2:RUN-3), (PART-2:RUN-6), (PART-2:RUN-9), (PART-3:SPCFNC-3), (PART-6:INSTAL-3) CUTTING SELECTION (PART-3:SPCFNC-1) DATA ERROR (PART-8:ERROR-2) DEFAULT DWELL (PART-4:WADR-6), (PART-6:INSTAL-6), (PART-6:INSTAL-16), (PART-6:INSTAL-31) DIAL-IN-KERF (PART-2:RUN-3), (PART-4:WADR-6), (PART-4:WADR-7), (PART-4:WADR-14), (PART-4:ESSI-3), (PART-4:ESSI-6) DIMENSIONS COMMON (PART-2:SHAPES-2) DISPLAY (PART-3:DSPY-1) DISPLAY KEY (PART-1:OPER-2) DISPLAY MODES (PART-3:DSYP-1) CONFIG (PART-3:DSPY-1), (PART-3:DSPY-2) EXIT MODE (PART-3:DSYP-1) FEEDRATE (PART-3:DSPY-1), (PART-3:DSPY-2) PARTS CUT (PART-3:DSPY-1) SERVICE DISPLAYS (PART-3:DSPY-1), (PART-3:DSPY-2) STATUS (PART-3:DSPY-1), (PART-3:DSPY-2) X/Y DISPLAY (PART-3:DSPY-1) DOUBLE WORD MEMORY (PART-6:INSTAL-38) DSPY VAR (PART-3:DSPY1), (PART-6:INSTAL-33) DSPY00 EXIT MODE (PART-6:INSTAL-3) DSPY02 PARTS CUT (PART-6:INSTAL-4) DSPY03 FEEDRATE (PART-6:INSTAL-4) DSPY10 SYS DATA (PART-6:INSTAL-4) EDITOR (PART-3:EDIT-1) ARC DIRECTION (PART-3:EDIT-3) COMMANDS (PART-3:EDIT-2) DELETING (PART-3:EDIT-4) DISPLAY (PART-3:EDIT-1) FUNCTION BLOCK (PART-3:EDIT-3) INSERTING (PART-3:EDIT-4) LINE/ARC BLOCK EDIT (PART-3:EDIT-2) PROGRAM EDIT (PART-3:EDIT-1) SAMPLE PROGRAM (PART-3:EDIT-11) TERMINATING (PART-3:EDIT-5) VERIFY (PART-3:EDIT-3) ENC COUNTS/REV (PART-6:INSTAL-13) ERROR MESSAGES (PART-8:ERROR-1) 0 BYTES (PART-8:ERROR-2) DATA COMM (PART-8:ERROR-3) DATA ERROR (PART-8:ERROR-2) DUPLICATE (PART-8:ERROR-1) END OF LIST (PART-8:ERROR-1) ENTER PROGRAM NUMBER (PART-8:ERROR-1) FORMAT (PART-8:ERROR-3) FRAMING (PART-8:ERROR-3) MEMORY DISABLED (PART-8:ERROR-1) MEMORY FULL (PART-8:ERROR-1) NO PROGRAM (PART-8:ERROR-1) OVERRUN (PART-8:ERROR-3) PATH ERROR (PART-8:ERROR-2) PROGRAM LIST EMPTY (PART-8:ERROR-1) PROGRAM NUMBER (PART-8:ERROR-3) READ TIME-OUT (PART-8:ERROR-3) RESET MODE (PART-8:ERROR-2) RUN TIME (PART-8:ERROR-2) SERIAL I/O (PART-8:ERROR-3) WRITE TIME-OUT (PART-8:ERROR-3) ERROR SPEED MAXIMUM (PART-6:INSTAL-5), (PART-6:INSTAL-10) ERROR WARNING DISTANCE (PART-6:INSTAL5), (PART-6:INSTAL-11), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-2) ESSI PROGRAMMING (PART-4:ESSI-1) AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (PART-4:ESSI-2) LINE AND ARC BLOCK (PART-4:ESSI-1) PROGRAMMING (PART-4:ESSI-1) SAMPLE PROGRAM (PART-4:ESSI-5) EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION (PART-6:EXAMPLE-1) EXIT MODE (PART-1:OPER-2), (PART-3:DSPY-1), (PART-3:SPCFNC-1), (PART-6:INSTAL-3), (PART-6:INSTAL-5) FEEDRATE (PART-1:OPER-3), (PART-3:EDIT-9), (PART-3:DSPY-1),
AO-73367
PART-11:INDEX-1

(PART-3:DSPY-2), (PART-4:WADR-6), (PART-4:WADR-14), (PART-4:ESSI-3), (PART-6:INSTAL-3), (PART-6:INSTAL-4), (PART-6:INSTAL-16), (PART-6:INSTAL-19), (PART-6:INSTAL-25), (PART-6:INSTAL-32), (PART-6:INSTAL-33), (PART-6:INSTAL-41), (PART-6:INSTAL-44), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-4) FILE DATA (PART-5:SERIAL-17), (PART-5:SERIAL-19) FILE EXTEN (PART-3:FLOPPY-1), (PART-3:FLOPPY-3), (PART-6:INSTAL-6), (PART-6:INSTAL-24) FILE GET (PART-3:SERIAL-17), (PART-5:SERIAL-18), (PART-5:SERIAL-19) FILE QUEUE (PART-5:SERIAL-17), (PART-5:SERIAL-19) FILE QUIT (PART-5:SERIAL-17), (PART-5:SERIAL-18), (PART-5:SERIAL-19) FLOPPY FLOPPY UTILITIES DISK (PART-3:FLOPPY-1) LOADING FILES (PART-3:FLOPPY-2) SAVING FILES (PART-3:FLOPPY-3) SERIAL CONNECTION (PART-3:FLOPPY-2) FLOPPY DISK DRIVES (PART-3:FLOPPY-1) FUNCTION SELECTION (PART-2:MENU-1) DELETE PROGRAM (PART-2:MENU-3) EDIT/NEW PROGRAM (PART-2:MENU-3) LOAD FROM FLOPPY (PART-2:MENU-3) LOAD FROM RS-232 (PART-2:MENU-2) LOAD FROM STD SHAPE (PART-2:MENU-2) RUN PROGRAM (PART-2:MENU-2) STORE FROM RS-232 (PART-2:MENU-2) STORE TO FLOPPY (PART-2:MENU-3) GAIN BREAK (PART-6:INSTAL-5), (PART-6:INSTAL-11), (PART-6:INSTAL-31), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-2) GENERAL OPERATIONS (PART-1:OPER-1) AXIS DEFINITIONS (PART-1:OPER-1) BACK UP (PART-1:OPER-4) CUTTING SPEED(PART-1:OPER-3) JOG (PART-1:OPER-3) KEYPAD (PART-1:OPER-1), (PART-1:OPER-2) LANGUAGE (PART-1:OPER-1) PART RETURN (PART-1:OPER-4) RECYCLE (PART-1:OPER-2) SCROLL ARROW KEYS (PART-1:OPER-3) GEOMETRY MODIFICATION (PART-2:RUN-1) PART ROTATION (PART-2:RUN-2) SCALING (PART-2:RUN-2) X/Y AXIS MIRROR (PART-2:RUN-2) GO HOME (PART-3:EDIT-9), (PART-3:SPCFNC-1), (PART-3:SPCFNC-5) GO HOME MENU (PART-3:SPCFNC-5) HANDSHAKING PROTOCOL (PART-5:SERIAL-13), (PART-6:INSTAL-45) HARDWARE HANDSHAKING (PART-5:SERIAL-5), (PART-5:SERIAL-7), (PART-5:SERIAL-13), (PART-5:SERIAL-15) HEIGHT CONTROL (PART-6:INSTAL-14) HEIGHT DISABLE (PART-3:SPCFNC-3), (PART-3:SPCFNC-4), (PART-6:INSTAL-44), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-3), (PART-7:MACHINE-3), (PART-7:MACHINE-4) HEIGHT RELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-5), (PART-6:INSTAL-14), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-3) HIGH PREHEAT (PART-2:RUN-4), (PART-2:RUN-7), (PART-3:SPCFNC-3) HOME INDEX SWITCH (PART-6:INSTAL-30) HOME POSITION (PART-1:OPER-4), (PART-2:RUN-9), (PART-3:SPCFNC-5), (PART-3:SPCFNC-6), (PART-3:SPCFNC-7), (PART-3:SPCFNC-8), (PART-4:WADR-5), (PART-4:WADR-12) (PART-4:ESSI-4), (PART-6:INSTAL-6), (PART-6:INSTAL-30) INSTALLATION AND SETUP (PART-6:INSTAL-1) ACCELERATION TIME (PART-6:INSTAL-8) ARC OFF DELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-12) ARC ON DELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-7) AUTOMATIC REFERENCE ADJUSTMENT (PART-6:INSTAL-40) AXIS SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-39) AXIS SPEED DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-39) BACKUP SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-8) BLEED-OFF TIME (PART-6:INSTAL-7) BP INPUT (PART-6:INSTAL-36) BP OUT (PART-6:INSTAL-36) CORNER SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-8) CUSTOM AUX (PART-6:INSTAL-41) DEFAULT DWELL (PART-6:INSTAL-16) DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-2) DOUBLE WORD MEMORY (PART-6:INSTAL-38) DSPY VAR (PART-6:INSTAL-33) ENC COUNT/REV (PART-6:INSTAL-13) ERROR SPEED MAXIMUM (PART-6:INSTAL-10) ERROR WARNING DISTANCE (PART-6:INSTAL-11) EXIT MODE (PART-6:INSTAL-3) FEEDRATE (PART-6:INSTAL-4) FILE EXTEN (PART-6:INSTAL-24) GAIN BREAK (PART-6:INSTAL-11) HEIGHT RELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-14) HOME INDEX SWITCH (PART-6:INSTAL-30) KNIFE BP ANGLE (PART-6:INSTAL-29) KNIFE DIA. (PART-6:INSTAL-29) LOOP BACK (PART-6:INSTAL-45) LOOP GAIN (PART-6:INSTAL-11) MARKER DELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-16) MARKING SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-16) MAX SLW ANG (PART-6:INSTAL-15) MAXIMUM DRIVE SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-8) MEM RESET (PART-6:INSTAL-40) MEMORY DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-36) MEMORY RESET (PART-6:INSTAL-40) MIN OFF DELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-16) MIN RAD SPED (PART-6:INSTAL-15) MIN SLW ANG (PART-6:INSTAL-15) MINIMUM HOLD SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-9) MULTIPLE SETUP (PART-6:INSTAL-31)
PART-11:INDEX-2
AO-73367
INDEX
OPERATING SYSTEM (PART-6:INSTAL-24) PARAMETER MENU (PART-6:INSTAL-7) PARTS CUT (PART-6:INSTAL-4) PLASMA TB1 (PART-6:INSTAL-15) PLATE SIDE (PART-6:INSTAL-14) POWER UP (PART-6:INSTAL-2) PROGRAM FORMAT (PART-6:INSTAL-19) PROGRAMMABLE OFFSETS (PART6:INSTAL-29) RADERR (PART-6:INSTAL-35) RADSCL (PART-6:INSTAL-35) REF ADJUST (PART-6:INSTAL-40) RUN SPD LIMIT (PART-6:INSTAL-10) SERIAL DEFINITION (PART-6:INSTAL-17) SERVICE MODE (PART-6:INSTAL-1), (PART-6:INSTAL-3) SHOW BYTE (PART-6:INSTAL-38) SHOW CRUB (PART-6:INSTAL-39) SHOW DBLE (PART-6:INSTAL-38) SHOW WORD (PART-6:INSTAL-37) SINGLE BYTE MEMORY DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-38) SINGLE WORD MEMORY (PART-6:INSTAL-37) SLOWDOWN DISTANCE (PART-6:INSTAL-12) SLOWDOWN RADIUS (PART-6:INSTAL-14) SPECIAL EOP (PART-6:INSTAL-22) SPEED CALIBRATION (PART-6:INSTAL-39) SPEED RANGE (PART-6:INSTAL-28) START DELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-16) SYS DATA (PART-6:INSTAL-4) SYS RESET (PART-6:INSTAL-46) SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PART-6:INSTAL-25) SYSTEM CONFIGURATION #2 (PART-6:INSTAL-25) SYSTEM DATA (PART-6:INSTAL-4) SYSTEM VARIABLE DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-33) TRAVERSE SPEED LIMIT (PART-6:INSTAL-10) V01-X DRIVE (PART-6:INSTAL-33) VARIABLE STORE (PART-6:INSTAL-45) X ABS (PART-6:INSTAL-34) X DRIVE DIR (PART-6:INSTAL-13) X ENC (PART-6:INSTAL-34) X ENC DIST/REV (PART-6:INSTAL-13) X ENCODER DIRECTION (PART-6:INSTAL-13) X ERROR (PART-6:INSTAL-34) X HOME (PART-6:INSTAL-34) X MARKER OFFSET (PART-6:INSTAL-15) X/Y DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-4) XCNTR (PART-6:INSTAL-36) XDAOUT (PART-6:INSTAL-33) XERSCL (PART-6:INSTAL-34) Y ABS (PART-6:INSTAL-35) Y DRIVE (PART-6:INSTAL-34) Y DRIVE DIRECTION (PART-6:INSTAL-13) Y ENC (PART-6:INSTAL-35) Y ENC DIST/REV (PART-6:INSTAL-13) Y ENCODER DIR (PART-6:INSTAL-13) Y ERROR (PART-6:INSTAL-35) Y HOME (PART-6:INSTAL-35) Y MARKER OFFSET (PART-6:INSTAL-16) YCNTR (PART-6:INSTAL-36) YDAOUT (PART-6:INSTAL-35) YERSCL (PART-6:INSTAL-35) KERF (PART-2:SHAPES-2), (PART-2:SHAPES-3), (PART-2:SHAPES-5), (PART-2:SHAPES-6), (PART-2:SHAPES-7), (PART-2:SHAPES-8), (PART-2:SHAPES-9), (PART-2:SHAPES-10), (PART-2:SHAPES-11), (PART-2:SHAPES-12), (PART-2:SHAPES-13), (PART-2:SHAPES-14), (PART-2:SHAPES-15), (PART-2:SHAPES-16), (PART-2:SHAPES-17), (PART-2:SHAPES-18), (PART-2:SHAPES-19), (PART-2:SHAPES-20), (PART-2:SHAPES-21), (PART-2:SHAPES-22), (PART-2:SHAPES-23), (PART-2:SHAPES-24), (PART-2:SHAPES-25), (PART-2:SHAPES-26), (PART-2:SHAPES-27), (PART-2:SHAPES-28), (PART-2:SHAPES-29), (PART-2:SHAPES-30), (PART-2:SHAPES-31), (PART-2:SHAPES-32), (PART-2:SHAPES-33), (PART-2:SHAPES-34), (PART-2:SHAPES-35), (PART-2:SHAPES-36), (PART-2:SHAPES-37), (PART-2:SHAPES-38), (PART-2:SHAPES-39), (PART-2:SHAPES-40), (PART-2:SHAPES-41), (PART-2:SHAPES-42), (PART-2:SHAPES-43), (PART-2:SHAPES-44), (PART-2:SHAPES-45), (PART-2:SHAPES-46), (PART-2:SHAPES-47), (PART-2:SHAPES-48), (PART-2:SHAPES-49), (PART-2:SHAPES-50), (PART-2:SHAPES-51), (PART-2:SHAPES-52), (PART-2:SHAPES-53), (PART-2:SHAPES-54), (PART-2:SHAPES-55), (PART-2:SHAPES-56), (PART-2:SHAPES-57), (PART-2:SHAPES-PART-2:RUN-3) (PART-3:EDIT-6), (PART-3:EDIT-8), (PART-3:EDIT-9), (PART-4:WADR-4), (PART-4:WADR-6), (PART-4:WADR-7), (PART-4:WADR-13), (PART-4:WADR-14), (PART-4:ESSI-3), (PART-4:ESSI-5), (PART-4:ESSI-6), (PART-6:INSTAL-19), (PART-6:INSTAL-25), (PART-6:INSTAL-32), (PART-6:INSTAL-42), (PART-6:INSTAL-43) KEY CHARACTER DESCRIPTIONS (PART-4:WADR-1) KNIFE BP ANGLE (PART-6:INSTAL-6), (PART-6:INSTAL-29)
AO-73367
PART-11:INDEX-3

KNIFE COMPENSATION (PART-2:RUN-3), (PART-6:INSTAL-29) KNIFE DIA. (PART-6:INSTAL-6), (PART-6:INSTAL-29) LIMIT SWITCHES (PART-3:SPCFNC-7), (PART-6:INSTAL-25) LOAD- FROM RS-232 (PART-2:MENU-2), (PART-5:SERIAL-15), (PART-5:SERIAL-16) LOOP BACK (PART-6:INSTAL-45) LOOP GAIN (PART-6:INSTAL-5), (PART-6:INSTAL-11), (PART-6:INSTAL-12), (PART-6:INSTAL-31), (PART-6:INSTAL-34), (PART-6:INSTAL-35), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-2), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-4) MACHINE INTERFACE (PART-7:MACHINE-1) MANUAL CONTROL (PART-3:SPCFNC-1), (PART-3:SPCFNC-2), (PART-3:SPCFNC-3), (PART-3:SPCFNC-4), (PART-3:SPCFNC-5) MANUAL CUT (PART-2:RUN-3), (PART-2:RUN-8) MANUAL OXY/FUEL (PART-2:RUN-7) MARKER DELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-16) MARKING SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-16) MAX SLW ANG (PART-6:INSTAL-15) MAXIMUM DRIVE SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-8) MEM RESET (PART-6:INSTAL-40) MEMORY DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-36) MEMORY RESET (PART-6:INSTAL-40) MIN OFF DELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-16) MIN RAD SPD (PART-6:INSTAL-15), (PART-6:INSTAL-31), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-3), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-5) MIN SLW ANG (PART-6:INSTAL-15), (PART-6:INSTAL-31), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-3) MINIMUM HOLD SPEED (PART-6:INSTAL-9) MIRROR (PART-2:RUN-2), (PART-2:RUN-3) MULTIPLE SETUP (PART-6:INSTAL-31), (PART-6:INSTAL-32) OPERATING SYSTEM (PART-6:INSTAL-24) OXY ENABLE (PART-3:SPCFNC-2) OXY PRHT/CUT (PART-3:SPCFNC-2) OXY START (PART-3:SPCFNC-3) OXYGEN/FUEL (PART-2:RUN-1), (PART-2:RUN-4), (PART-2:RUN-7), (PART-2:RUN-8), (PART-3:SPCFNC-1), (PART-3:SPCFNC-2), (PART-6:INSTAL-1), (PART-6:INSTAL-7), (PART-6:INSTAL-12), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-2), OXYGEN SWITCH (PART-3:SPCFNC-2) PARAMETER MENU (PART-6:INSTAL-7) PARITY ERROR (PART-5:SERIAL-21), (PART-8:ERROR-3) PART COUNT (PART-2:RUN-4) PART ROTATION (PART-2:RUN-2) PARTS CUT (PART-3:DSPY-1), (PART-6:INSTAL-4) PIERCE RAMP (PART-2:RUN-3), (PART-2:RUN-4), (PART-2:RUN-7) PLASMA ARC ON INPUT (PART-7:MACHINE-3) PLASMA CUT (PART-2:RUN-7), (PART-3:SPCFNC-3), (PART-3:SPCFNC-4) PLASMA CUT/JOG (PART-3:SPCFNC-4) PLASMA CUTTING (PART-2:RUN-4), (PART-2:RUN-8), (PART-6:INSTAL-1), (PART-6:INSTAL-7), (PART-6:INSTAL-12), (PART-6:INSTAL-15) PLASMA ENABLE (PART-3:SPCFNC-3) (PART-3:SPCFNC-4) PLASMA MANUAL CONTROL (PART-3:SPCFNC3) PLASMA TB1 (PART-6:INSTAL-15) PLASMA-OXYGEN/FUEL (PART-2:RUN-1) PLATE ALIGNMENT (PART-2:RUN-5) PREHEAT (PART-2:RUN-4), (PART-3:SPCFNC-3), (PART-3:SPCFNC-4), (PART-6:INSTAL-27), (PART-6:INSTAL-28), (PART-6:INSTAL-35) PROGRAM FORMAT (PART-4:PROG-1) (PART-4:WADR-3), (PART-4:WADR-7), (PART-4:ESSI-4), (PART-6:INSTAL-19), (PART-6:INSTAL-41), (PART-6:INSTAL-42) PROGRAMMABLE OFFSETS (PART-6:INSTAL-16), (PART-6:INSTAL-29) PROGRAMMING (PART-4:PROG-1), (PART-4:WADR-1), (PART-4:WADR-2), (PART-4:WADR-3), (PART-4:WADR-4), (PART-4:WADR-7), (PART-4:WADR--8), (PART-4:WADR-9), (PART-4:ESSI-1), (PART-4:ESSI-2), (PART-6:INSTAL-17), (PART-6:INSTAL-18), (PART-6:INSTAL-19), (PART-6:INSTAL-29) PROGRAMMING THE NC CONTROL (PART-4:PROG-1) RADERR (PART-6:INSTAL-35) RADSCL (PART-6:INSTAL-35) REF ADJUST (PART-6:INSTAL-40) RS-422 (PART-5:SERIAL-3), (PART-5:SERIAL-4), (PART-5:SERIAL-6), (PART-5:SERIAL-11) RTS/CTS HARDWARE (PART-5:SERIAL-13), (PART-5:SERIAL-14) RUN SPD LIMIT (PART-6:INSTAL-10) RUNNING A PROGRAM (PART-2:RUN-1) AUTO CUT (PART-2:RUN-4) CUTTING MODE (PART-2:RUN-3) CYCLE START (PART-2:RUN-5) DIAL-IN-KERF (PART-2:RUN-3) HIGH PREHEAT (PART-2:RUN-4) KNIFE COMPENSATION (PART-2:RUN-3) MANUAL CUT (PART-2:RUN-3) PART COUNT (PART-2:RUN-4) PIERCE RAMP (PART-2:RUN-4) PLATE ALIGNMENT (PART-2:RUN-5) SINGLE STEP (PART-2:RUN-5) TEST RUN (PART-2:RUN-4) SCALING (PART-2:RUN-1), (PART-2:RUN-2) SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS (PART-2:MENU-2),
PART-11:INDEX-4
AO-73367
INDEX
(PART-3:FLOPPY-1), (PART-5:SERIAL-1) LOAD FROM RS232 (PART-5:SERIAL-15), (PART-5:SERIAL-16) CAD LINK (PART-5:SERIAL-17) CHARACTER FORMATS (PART-5:SERIAL13) COMMUNICATION ENHANCEMENT (PART-5:SERIAL-15) CONNECTING TO RS-232C (PART-5:SERIAL-5) FILE DATA (PART-5:SERIAL-17) FILE GET (PART-5:SERIAL-18) FILE QUEUE (PART-5:SERIAL-19) FILE QUIT (PART-5:SERIAL-20) HANDSHAKING PROTOCOL (PART-5:SERIAL-13) HARDWARE HANDSHAKING (PART-5:SERIAL-7) PIN CONFIGURATION (PART-5:SERIAL-6) RTS/CTS HARDWARE (PART-5:SERIAL-13) SOFTWARE HANDSHAKING (PART-5:SERIAL-9) SPECIAL HANDSHAKING (PART-5:SERIAL-15) THREE DIGIT STATUS (PART-5:SERIAL-20) XON/XOFF SOFTWARE (PART-5:SERIAL-14) SERIAL DEFINITION (PART-3:FLOPPY-2), (PART-3:FLOPPY-3), (PART-6:INSTAL-17) SERV05- SYS STATUS (PART-6:INSTAL-4) SERVICE MODE (PART-6:INSTAL-1), (PART-6:INSTAL-3), (PART-6:INSTAL-31), (PART-6:INSTAL-39) SET HOME (PART-3:SPCFNC-1), (PART-3:SPCFNC-5), (PART-3:SPCFNC-7) SETTING TABLE 1 HOME POSITION (PART-3:SPCFNC-7) SETUP EXAMPLE (PART-6:EXAMPLE-1) EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION (PART-6:EXAMPLE-1) SHAPE SELECTION (PART-2:MENU-2), (PART-2:SHAPES-1) SHOW BYTE (PART-3:DSPY-1), (PART-6:INSTAL-38) SHOW CRUB (PART-3:DSPY-1), (PART-6:INSTAL-39) SHOW CRUW (PART-6:INSTAL-38) SHOW DBLE (PART-6:INSTAL-38) SHOW WORD (PART-6:INSTAL-37) SINGLE BYE MEMORY DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-38) SINGLE STEP (PART-2:RUN-5) (PART-2:RUN-9) SINGLE WORD MEMORY (PART-6:INSTAL-37) SLOWDOWN DISTANCE (PART-6:INSTAL-9), (PART-6:INSTAL-12), (PART-6:INSTAL-31), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-2) SLOWDOWN RADIUS (PART-6:INSTAL-14) (PART-6:INSTAL-31) (PART-6:EXAMPLE-2) SOFTWARE HANDSHAKING (PART-5:SERIAL-9) SPD CAL (PART-6:INSTAL-39) SPECIAL EOP (PART-6:INSTAL-22) SPECIAL FUNCTIONS PART-3:SPCFNC-1) CUTTING SELECTION (PART-3:SPCFNC-1) GO HOME (PART-3:SPCFNC-5) GO HOME MENU (PART-6:SPCFNC-5) HEIGHT DISABLE (PART-6:SPCFNC-4) HOME POSITION (PART-6:SPCFNC-7) MANUAL CONTROL (PART-6:SPCFNC-1), (PART-6:SPCFNC-3) OXY ENABLE (PART-6:SPCFNC-2) OXY PRHT/CUT (PART-6:SPCFNC-2) OXY START (PART-6:SPCFNC-3) PLASMA CUT (PART-6:SPCFNC-3) PLASMA CUT/JOG (PART-6:SPCFNC-4) PLASMA ENABLE (PART-6:SPCFNC-4) PLASMA MANUAL CONTROL (PART-6:SPCFNC-3) PLASMA START (PART-6:SPCFNC-4) PREHEAT (PART-6:SPCFNC-3) SET HOME (PART-6:SPCFNC-7) SPECIAL HANDSHAKING (PART-5:SERIAL-15) SPEED CALIBRATION (PART-6:INSTAL-33) (PART-6:INSTAL-39), (PART-6:INSTAL-46), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-1) SPEED RANGE (PART-6:INSTAL-7), (PART-6:INSTAL-8), (PART-6:INSTAL-28), (PART-6:EXAMPLE-1) STANDARD SHAPES (PART-1:INTRO-1), (PART-2:MENU-1), (PART-2:MENU-2), (PART-2:SHAPES-2), (PART-6:INSTAL-14), (PART-6:INSTAL-24) DIMENSIONS COMMON (PART-2:SHAPES-2) SHAPE SELECTION (PART-2:SHAPES-1) START DELAY (PART-6:INSTAL-16) SYS DATA (PART-3:DSPY-1), PART-6:INSTAL-4) SYS RESET (PART-6:INSTAL-46) SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PART-6:INSTAL-25) SYSTEM CONFIGURATION #2 (PART-6:INSTAL-25) SYSTEM DATA (PART-6:INSTAL-4) SYSTEM VARIABLE DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-33) TABLE HOMES FROM PART PROGRAMS (PART-3:SPCFNC6) TEST RUN (PART-2:RUN-3), (PART-2:RUN-4), (PART-2:RUN-6), (PART-2:RUN-8) THREE DIGIT STATUS (PART-5:SERIAL-20) TRAVERSE SPEED LIMIT (PART-6:INSTAL-10) V01-X DRIVE (PART-6:INSTAL-33) VARIABLE STORE (PART-6:INSTAL-45) WORD ADDRESS (PART-4:WADR-1) AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (PART-4:WADR-5) CODE DESCRIPTIONS (PART-4:WADR-6) DATA BLOCK (PART-4:WADR-1) DWELL TIME (PART-4:WADR-6) FEEDRATE (PART-4:WADR-6) G PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS (PART-4:WADR-4) I DIMENSION (PART-4:WADR-2) J DIMENSION (PART-4:WADR-3) KEY CHARACTERS (PART-4:WADR-1) LINE NUMBER (PART-4:WADR-1) PROGRAM NUMBER (PART-4:WAD4-1) PROGRAMMING (PART-4:WADR-1) SAMPLE PROGRAM (PART-4:WADR-13) X DIMENSION (PART-4:WADR-2) Y DIMENSION (PART-4:WAD4-2) X ABS (PART-6:INSTAL-34) X DRIVE DIR (PART-6:INSTAL-13) X ENC (PART-6:INSTAL-34) X ENC DIST/REV (PART-6:INSTAL-13)
AO-73367
PART-11:INDEX-5

X ENCODER DIRECTION (PART-6:INSTAL-13) X ERROR (PART-6:INSTAL-34) X HOME (PART-6:INSTAL-34) X MARKER OFFSET (PART-6:INSTAL-15) X DIMENSION FOR LINES OR ARCS (PART-4:WADR-2) X/Y DISPLAY (PART-6:INSTAL-4) XCNTR (PART-6:INSTAL-36) XDAOUT (PART-6:INSTAL-33) XERSCL (PART-6:INSTAL-34) XON/XOFF SOFTWARE (PART-5:SERIAL-14) Y ABS (PART-6:INSTAL-35) Y DRIVE (PART-6:INSTAL-34) Y DRIVE DIRECTION (PART-6:INSTAL-13) Y ENC (PART-6:INSTAL-35) Y ENC DIST/REV (PART-6:INSTAL-13) Y ENCODER DIRECTION (PART-6:INSTAL-13) Y ERROR (PART-6:INSTAL-35) Y HOME (PART-6:INSTAL-35) Y MARKER OFFSET (PART-6:INSTAL-16) YCNTR (PART-6:INSTAL-36) YDAOUT (PART-6:INSTAL-35) YERSCL (PART-6:INSTAL-35)
PART-11:INDEX-6
AO-73367
SCHEMATICS: DRAWINGS AND SCHEMATICS
DRAWINGS AND SCHEMATICS
Drawing List for the BURNY 1250 Operator Control System MYY-10770
DYY-23995 DYY-21840 DYY-21880 DYY-21910 Schematic, BURNY 1250 Operator Control System Schematic, BURNY 1250 Operator Control System, with External E-Stop, Powered Marker & Lifter Solenoid Outputs Schematic, BURNY 1250 Operator Control System, with External E-Stop Schematic, BURNY 1250 Operator Control System, with 14 Pin CPC For External E-Stop, Limits, Homes, Warning Option, Optional Bus Powered Lifter Ouput Assembly, Model M21 Encoder Schematic, Male - Female Encoder Cable Schematic, Armature and Tachometer Cable Schematic, BURNY 1250 Speed Adjust Card Part Layout, 120 Watt PWM Drive Card Modular Encoder Parameters Assembly, M21 Encoder to MT2630 Motor Schematic, BURNY 1400 Front Panel Keypad Schematic, 1000 Series RS-232 / 422 Adapter Card Outline Drawing Inline and Folded MT2630 With Encoder BURNY 1250 Mounting Dimensions Schematic, BURNY 1250 Interface Card Schematic, BURNY 1250 Relay Card Schematic, BURNY 1400 120Watt PWM Drive Card External Connection Diagram BURNY 1250
BO-11464 BO-11465 BO-11263 BO-23996 BO-6847 BO-9371 CO-11466 CO-21356 CO-27617 D30-1083 D30-60130 DO-23982 DO-23983 DO-23988 DO-42292
AO-73367
PART-12:SCHEMATICS-1
Spare Parts List for the BURNY 1250 Operator Control System MYY-10770
MO-03067 MO-07231 MO-07320 MO-08601 MO-10727 MO-10773 MO-10796 MO-10863 B14-28123 A16-21478 A16-21480 X16-09149 X16-16707 X18-10371 X21-00185 X21-03004 X21-10957 X21-15588 Beeper Assembly 1200 Encoder Input Card 1000 Series RS232/422 Adapter NC2.5/2.8 Main Card with High Resolution BURNY 1250 Relay Card BURNY 1400 120 Watt PWM Drive Card BURNY 1250 Interface Card, 5 V Encoders BURNY 1250 Speed Adjust Card Transformer, 115/230V Primary, 44 VCT, 5 A Secondary Lifter Switch Toggle, Mom-Off-Mom Speed Range Switch Toggle, On-Off-On Contact Block, 1nc 115 Vac 10 A Emergency Stop Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset SPFW Bridge Rectifier 12 A, 600 V Fuse, 2 A 250 V (Qty 1 used on MO-10796) Fuse, 10 A 250 V (Qty 1 used on MO-10727) Fuse, 3 AG 8 A 125 V (Qty 2 used on MO-10773) Fuse, 3 A, PC Mount (Qty 1 used on MO-10773)
PART-12:SCHEMATICS-2
AO-73367
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK

Burny 1250 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Burny 1250 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BURNY

1250 & 1250 Plus

Burny 1250 -- Installation Instructions to insure compliance with EMC Directive

Burny 1250 -- Installation Instructions to insure compliance with EMC Directive

WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

PART 1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW

GENERAL OPERATIONS SUMMARY

PART 2: SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

STANDARD SHAPE SELECTION

PART 3: SYSTEM UTILITIES

FLOPPY DRIVE OPERATION

PART 4: PART PROGRAMMING

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

PART 5: SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

PART 6: INSTALLATION AND SETUP

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

TYPICAL SETUP EXAMPLE

PART 7: MACHINE INTERFACE

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

PART 8: ERROR MESSAGES

PART 10: DRIVES AND CALIBRATION

PART 11: INDEX

PART 12: DRAWINGS AND SCHEMATICS

WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

OVERVIEW: GENERAL OPERATIONS

1250 GENERAL OPERATIONS SUMMARY

OPTIONAL LANGUAGE FEATURE

APPLYING POWER TO THE MACHINE

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

KEYPAD LAYOUT FOR NON-PLUS 1250

SPEED PART RET. SHF

OVERVIEW: GENERAL OPERATIONS

Up and Down Scroll Arrow Keys

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

OVERVIEW: GENERAL OPERATIONS

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

MAIN FUNCTION SELECTION MENU

These function selections are described in the sections that follow.

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

LOAD- FROM STD SHAPE

LOAD- FROM RS-232

STORE- FROM RS-232

LOAD- FROM FLOPPY

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

LOAD/RUN FROM FLOPPY

OPERATIONS: STANDARD SHAPES

STANDARD SHAPE SELECTION

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

Start point or repeat directions are as follows:

DIMENSIONS COMMON TO MOST SHAPES

OPERATIONS: STANDARD SHAPES

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

OPERATIONS: STANDARD SHAPES

REPEAT PATTERNS AUTO MANUAL

IF AUTO REPEAT MODE: 11. VERIFY- YES/NO 12. VERIFY- YES/NO

IF MANUAL REPEAT MODE: 11. Repeat direction: (1 of 4 sides)

1250 Operation and Maintenance Manual

PLATE SIDE LEFT RIGHT

IF AUTO REPEAT MODE: 9. VERIFY- YES/NO

OPERATIONS: STANDARD SHAPES

AUTO PLATE SIDE LEFT RIGHT